IC-NRLF BERKELEY LI&s.AJlY NJVfckSiTY Of CALIFORNIA ^ ' ^ C^v ^s t -J^^' '3Z*~&+*^ ~ A PRACTICAL RUSSIAN GRAMMAR y flAMMA/TO PRACTICAL GRAMMAR OF THE RUSSIAN LANGUAGE L Y JAMES HEARD. S'. P E TERSE URG. POINTED FOR THE AUTHOR , AND SOLD BY SLEUNINE , AND BY BOOSEY AND SONS LONDON. 1827. /I/.HO JA31TOA>H HE^ATATb TIO3BOAEHO ci> mtMt , Hmo6bi no HaneHamaHiH , #o BbinycKa n cejiib 3K- ceil KHHTH B-b U^ensypHbiM KOMH- npenpoBo^K/\CHiH , Ky/^a c^-fe^yern-b, na iH yaaKOHeniH. C. Ileinep6ypr'b , IIOHH , 1826 ro^a. KpacoeCKiii. TiinorPA(j)iii 4 E1IAPTAMEHTA HAPOAHAFO PREFACE. The English, whose political y com- mercial > or other intercourse with Russia , may have rendered a know- ledge of the language desirable , have hither to had no other ?neans of acquiring it, but through the jnedium of grammars , written in French or German. It is for the public to decide how far this defect has been supplied by the present work , in the composition of which the author has been most ably assis- ted by M r . Charles Svenske , and 130 IV has made an unreserved use of all the works hitherto published in other languages upon Russian grammar. * The simplicity of the plan adap- ted will greatly facilitate the labour of the student , while the ideas con- tained in the exercises will tend to relieve his mind from the irksome dryness of grammatical rides. The road to some sciences lies through delightful scenery , but tlie path, that leads to the knowledge of a language ,is dreary and uninviting , and requires to be strewed with flowers. The themes, which are given in the following pages , upon the most important rules, consist of select sentences, (*) Especially of the following: MamHKa , cOHMHCHHa^ MMnepamopcKoio Poc- CIMCKOIO AKaflCMieio. Onbim-b o PyccKnxi> cnpa- jKeHisxij H. Fpe^a. Grammaire Russe a 1'usage des Strangers par Reiff. Praclische Grammalik der Russischen Sprache von Vater. Teoretisch- practiscke Grammalik der Russiscken Spracke von Tappe. y gradually increasing in difficulty as the scholar proceeds; and followed by promiscuous exercises(at the end of each principal part of speech t extracted from the works oj the most celebrated Rus- sian authors. It is necessary to ob- serve , that no rules are anticipated in these themes , which run chiefly upon the remarks immediately preced- ing , and occasionally upon parts previously explained. Whenever the construction of the Russian phrase differs from the construction of the English, the arrangement of the words in the columns below will poijit out the order to be adopted in the translation. Most of the apparent irregularities of the Russian Etymology being founded upon the mutability of the letters , the scholar is advised to pay particular attention to that part of the grammar, which treats of their chan- ges a/id reciprocal effect upon each VI oilier in the formation of deriva- tives , and in the declension and modification of words. These changes will explain the omission of some rules, that are to be found in other grammars, but which are rendered superfluous by a knowledge of the more fundamental rules relating to the letters. Although an endeavour has been made to explain the pronunciation of the Russian letters , it 7nust be confessed, that all attempts to express the sounds of one language , by the characters of another are imperfect, oral instruction being the only sure means of acquiring a correct pro- nunciation. To prevent a false accen- tuation the Russian words, which occur in the following work, are all accented. INTRODUCTION. ^ JL he origin and early history of the Slavonian , as of other primitive languages , are lost in obscurity. In the IX century two Greek missionaries were sent into Moravia by the Emperor Michael III , to translate the Bible, and other theological works, into that longue, and finding letters unknown to the inhabitants , they composed an alphabet after the model of the Greek, with a few additional characters, to express the sounds peculiar to the Slavo- nian language. Thus the benign light of Christianity brought with it the first dawn of civilization and science. From this epoch until the subjugation of Russia by the Tartars , may be called the first period of the literature. The Till oppressive dominion of those barbarians for more than two centuries effectually checked the rising spirit of improvement, that had been introduced from the Eastern Empire, and first caused the language of the people to differ from the ecclesias- tical dialect, by the introduction of many Tartar and Mogul words into common use. The civil reform effected by Peter the Great, forms the third remarkable epoch in the history of the language, which was then enriched by the adoption of many words relating to the arts and sci- ences introduced in Russia by that Monarch. Since that period, many writers have arisen, both in prose and verse, who have cultivated and improved their lan- guage , and done honour to the literature of their country. The dialect of the Bible and other theological works has remained invariably the same, uninfluenced, eithep by the IX dominion of the Tartars, or the intercourse of Russia with the other nations of Europe. Hence the difference that at present exists between the Slavonian or church dialect, and the modern Russian language. From the gigantic strides , which this mighty Empire is making in literature , science and the arts , we may reasonably anticipate the period, when its rich, har- monious and energetic language will be studied by the other nations of Europe for the sake of its original productions. As yet, we have seen only a few rays of the literary sun, whirch is dawning upon the North, but their brightness sufficiently bespeaks the glory of its meridian splendour. A.BBR.EVI ATIONS ilo jo made use of in tlte following gi^ainniar^ zidi -;bnJa i>iJiJ ; inoi r i Nom. nominative case. . . Gen. genitive case. Dat. dative case; 3ifo bus 9 Ace. accusative ca*e. . 9I ft. 9^410 Ins. instrumental case. Prep, prepositfonal case. Sing. singular. : jjo sdJ 7- Plu. plural. . k lo aiBa Mas. masculine. Fern. feminine. Neut. neuter. ' Com. common. T r r Inf. infinitive. Ind. indefinite. aJssx Def. definite. Perf. perfect. Per. person. CONTENTS. PART. L PACE, PRONUNCIATION PART II. ETYMOLOGY . ....... g CHAP. I. SUBSTANTIVES. Sect i. General remarks. ............ 10 2. Declension of masculine substantives . - 12 3. Declension of feminine substantives .... 23 4- Declension of neuter substantives ..... 4 2 5- Formation of feminine substantives from ma- sculine ... ........... 59 6. National appellations ........... 61 7. Patronymick appellations .......... 63 8. Augmentatives and diminutives ..... 65 XII CHAP. II. AD J ECTI YES. PACE. Sect i. General remarks ^ o 2. Declension of adjectives n a 3. Degrees of signification 79 4- Possessive adjectives 87 5. Apocopated adjectives Qt 6. Augmentative and diminutive adjectives . i . 94 CHAP. III. NUME RALS. Sect i. Cardinal numbers 101 2. Ordinal numbers . < no CHAP. IV. PRONOUN S. Sect i. General remarks 117 2. Personal pronouns 118 3. Relative pronouns ja3 4. Possessive pronouns 128 5. Demonstrative pronouns i3i 6. Indefinite pronouns i35 CHAP. V. VERBS. Sect i. General remarks 140 2. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb .... i44 3. Conjugation of active and neuter verbs. . . i5o 4 Formation of the branches, moods, tenses and persons *56 5. Conjugation of passive verbs 176 6. Reflective, reciprocal and common verbs . . 186 XIII PAGE. 7. Compound verts .. 8. Impersonal verbs. 9. Irregular verbs jo. Remarks on the use of the tenses and 232 moods .a- CHAP. VI. PARTICIPLES. Declension of participles 2 47 CHAP. VII. ADVERBS. Different kinds of adverbs a5S CHAP. VIII. PREP OS I T I O N S List of prepositions 264 CHAP. IX. CONJUNCTIONS. Different kinds of conjunctions ... . 27 CHAP. X. INTERJECTIONS. Different kinds of interjections 275 CHAP. XI. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. Sect i. Deiivation 277 2. Composition . . . , 284 XIV PART ffl. SYNTAX. CHAP. I. CONCORDANCE. PAGE. Sect i. Concordance of nouns in general .... 287 2. Concordance of verbs 290 CHAP. II. GOVERNMENT. Sect i. Government of substantives 293 2. Government of adjectives ........ 2Q3 3. Government of numerals 295 4 Government of \erbs 296 5. Government of adverbs 3o4 6. Government of prepositions 3o6 CHAP. III. CONSTRUCTION .. Sog PART IV. ORTHOGRAPHY 3i4 PART I. PRONUNCIATION. i. 1 he first principles , or elements of pronunciation are letters. In the Russian alphabet there are thirty four letters, which bear the following sounds.* A a ah , ex 6a6a , an old woman , baba. E 6 ba, 6a6oqKa, a butterfly, babotchka. B B va, Bo^a, water, voda. r r ta, roAi>, a year, goad. A A, da, AOMT* , a house, dom. E e a , BCApo , a pail , vedro. jfK. JK ja, ace ea , a woman , Jena. * The English letters, made use of in explain- ing the sound of the Russian characters , are to be pronounced as follows : a as in fate. u as in pure. a as in far. g as in game. e as in me. j as the french j. e as in met. z as in zephyr. e as e mute. ch as the Scotch pro- 6 as in no. nunciation of ch in o as in not. loch, och ! &c. oo as in mood tch as in fetch, sh as in shame. 3 3 za, sojiomo, gold, zolotu. M H e, BHAV, a view, veedd. I i e, used before a vowel only, ex. MHtnie, opinion, mnaried. K K ka , Kopojib. a king, Korole. A ji el, . Majio, little, maid. M M em, Mpzhiopb , marble , mramor. H H en, Haiirb, our, nash. O o o, OKHO, a window, okno. On pa, nenejii> , ashes, pepell. P p r , pano , early , rand. G c s, cnacenie, salvation, spasanea. T m ^ ta, mBep^ocmb, hardness, tverdoste. V y oo, ympo , morning, ootrb. fy ef, , a flag, flagg. X x klia, a guttural sound, resembling the Scotch pronunciation of ch, in loch, etc. ex,xnmpocmb,cunning, chcetroste. \\ Y^ tsa, (a combination of m and c) ex. l^apb, a king, tsar. ^ q tcha, qe.ioBtKTj , a man , tchelovayk. Ill m sha , mepcnib, wool, schfirste. U\ u; sh-tcha, (a combination of in and q) ex. 111,6/1, p oc m i> , b ou n ty t sh- tchedroste. -b yerr , used at the end of words ter- minating in a consonant, to which it gives a hard sound , ex. cmoab , a table , stolL ( 3 ) M ui , guttural , ex. pbifta , a fish, ruela. j> yare , used at the end of words ter- minating in a consonant , to which it gives a soft sound , nearly corresponding to the English e mute, ex pa^ocraB, joy , radoste. 'B t ya, ptKa, a river, rayka. 33 e, 3KOHOMTJ, a land ' steward , ekonom, K) K) y ou ? MHoraa, a youth, younosha. H a ya , apocmb , fury , yaroste. Be fa, apneMemMKa, arithmetic, aref- meteka. Most of the ahove letters invariably re- tain their proper sound, the following how- ever arc subject to slight variations. T, ga. 2. In some instances bears the sound of a strongly aspirated h: repoS, a hero, heroy' renepajrb , a general, /teneralj FocnoAb, Lord, Hospod , and in the terminations of adjectives and pronouns, in the genitive case, may be pronounced either as v or. h, ero, yalio or ycwo qrno HOBaro ? what news , tchtO n(5- , or ndvavd ? E , a. 3. At the commencement of words bears ( 4 ) the sound of ya, ex: ecmb, it is, yaste ; e^ea, scarcely, yadva. When it precedes two conso- nants , or a consonant followed by the hard sign, z. , it generally bears the sound of yeo , us in yeoman, the accent falling upon o, ex. MC^T) , honey, mcodd; jiem>, flax, leonn; ope>b, an eagle, oreoll. , ya. $ 4. Is pronounced like ya at the commence- ment of a word , and like a in the middle or at the end , ex. txamb, to ride , yachat ; ^t- Hocnib, idleness, Idnoste-^ Ha cmo.it, on the table , na stolldy. 5. There are eleven vowels in the Russian alphabet , which are divided into hard aud soft, hard. a t o, y , &z. soft. /E, e y JO, H f i, 3, t>. In the combination of vowels with con- sonants they are subject to the following va- riations : the letter w following r, K, x, JK, q, ui or u; chan- ges into u H r, K, x, JK, q, in, m,, or u, a w r, K, x, JK, H, in, iu, or i; / o JK, q, m, 114, or ij e - e q, K, x, o H before another vowel, i The only diphthongs in the Russian Language C 5 ) are those formed by the combination of n with the other vowels: an, en, in, OH, yn , bin, nn When n occurs without the w it must be pro- nounced separately from the vowel , which precedes it , ex. BOHHI> , a warrior , vo - een. Whenever two vowels occur together in a word, (excepting the above-mentioned diphthongs) each bears its full and separate sound , ex. BO- o-Spa/KCHie, imagination, v~)-ob-ra-ja-ne-a. 6. The 21 Consonants of the Russian alphabet are divided according to the organ, which prin- cipally contributes to their pronunciation into, hard soft hard soft labials n 6 * B invariable dentals in (e) A c 3 EJ, variable palatals in JK q [^invariable gutturals K r X variable The remaining four consonants: ji , M, n 9 p, are neither hard, nor soft, and are called liquids. In the modifications of the variable parts of speech, in compound substantives and deri- vatives , the variable consonants are frequently changed into their corresponding palatals, hard into hard, and soft into soft. The soft consonants 2, 4, and 3, change into the soft palatal JK , ex. Eon,, God, 66- atecKin, divine; B^-binb, to see , uk/Ky , I see ; Knfl3b, prince, KHflHtecKiM, princely. The hard Consonants, #, 777, and 14 change into the hard palatal z t ex. cKaicanib, to jump. CKaqy, / jump njiamkmb, to pay, n\ia*iy, I pay. The hard consonants c and x chpnge into the hard palatal w , ex. naxaint , to plough , naiiiy, I plough npockmi>, to ask, npoiiiy, I ask. Cm and 777 change into 114 , ex. cBwcmarnb to whistle CBnu;y, I whistle; CBflrnoH , holy, cua- ujeHHoii, sacred. A knowledge of the above rules will greatly facilitate the acquisition of the Language and explain its apparent irregularities. EXERCISE ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTERES. Exer. I. (dene) day. rpoarb , (gromm) thun- , (svailt) light. der. xpaMTj(chram) a temple. AOTKAI* , (clojd) rain. CHbrb, (snaygg) snow. nw^b , (puel) dust. qacT>, (tchass) an hour. Xjrfc6i>, (chlayb) bread. Hom, (notch) night. BOAa, (voda) water. pyna , (rooka) a hand. ( 7 A , (zemlia) the earth. ympo, ^ootro) the mor- ning. Beqep-b , (vatcher) the evening. Hora, (^noga) a foot* e, (leetso^ the face, j, (gorod) a town. , (tchainick) a tea-pot. V. 5. BOHCKO , (voisko) an army. rojioBa , fgoldva) the head, street. , (yabloko) an apple. , (dorOga) a road. Kapema,(karettaJ a car- riage. raejitra, (telayga)a cart. K)Hoiua , (younosha) a youth. rocyAaph/gossoodar) sir. rocnoAHH-b , (gospodinj master. fecuiHHa, ("esteenna) truth. Koposa, (korovaj a cgw. KOMHama, (komnataj a room. / , (dayveetsa) a girl. (Jcnshtchee- na) a woman. 6e3B*mpie, (bazvaytrea) a calm rocmiiHHHija , (gosten- netsaj a tavern. crapoenie, (stro-anea) a building. ceaenie, (salanea) a vil- lage. MocmoBan , (mostovaya) pavement. qepHHjibHMr;a , ftcher- nelnetsaj an ink-stand. , fjevotno-a) , (skoto- vodstvo} breeding of cattle. aBie, Ctshtchasla- vea) vanity. XJitGonaiiiecmBo , chlay- bopashestvo) agricul- ture, ie , fmora- c plavanea) navigation. , (oo-adena- nea) solitude. stopolojanea) situation. (na- rodonasalanea) popu lation. onrb noAoGna Miioro- ropo^a. Hmo eacejin 6bi a npa- MO H3T> Poccin npiixajn> BT> AHFJIIIO , ne BiiAaBij f uii Peim- Exer 2. The road from Do- ver to London is like the high street of a populous city. What if I had come straight from Russia to England, and had not seen the banks of the CKHXI, HH CeHCKHXii 6e- Elb , the Rhine or the ne GBIBIJ HH BI> Seine; had neither been in Germany, Switzer- land nor France! I think would have astonished H, HH BTjIIlBeif- [, HH BO CDpaHuiH? /JyiviaiO, lino KapmiiHa the picture of England AHTJIUI eiu,e Gojite no- pasHjiaGi* MOH lyBcmBa; ona Gbijia Gw AJIH MCHH HOBtC. Kauoe MHorojiiOAcni- BO ! KanaH Abnmejib- u np H mo MI Ka- me velty would have been still greater. What populousness ! what activity and what order! Every thing pre- KOH ( 9 3 ! Bee sents an appearance of content; not profusion, xoma He but abundance. From pocKouiH, HOMSoGHJiifl. Dover to London not one object reminded me of human misery. Karamzin. Letters of a Russian onrb iia He HanoMHHjrb KapaMannb. b nucejub PycKaeo ny- meuiecmeeHHUKa, traveller. PART II. ETYMOLOGY. Etymology properly signifies the derivation of words ; but its meaning has been extended by Grammarians to their properties and modi- fications , in which more extensive sense it. is here used. Parts of speech. S 7. All the words of the Russian Language are divided into ten classes , or parts of speech. C i. Substantives, Il\iacy- 2. Adjectives, HMJI jipn- jiarame.,*bHoe. 3. Numerals, HMH- MM- cjiwmejiLHoe. 4- Pronouns, MfccrnoH- 6. Participles, ITpHia- cmie. 7. Adverbs, Haptqie. 8. Prepositions, llpe^- 9. Conjunctions, CoK)3Tj 10. Interjections, Me/K 5. Verbs, The first six parts of speech are called variable , their terminations being subject to changes j the four last are invariable , except- ing the adverb, which has degrees of compa- rison like the adjective. Rem. There are no articles in the Russian Language. CHAP. I. SUBSTANTIVES. SECT I. GENERAL REMARKS. 8. Substantives in the Russian Language are subject to modifications according to their number, gender and case. Number. There are two numbes , the singu- lar and the plural. Gender. The masculine and feminine gen- ders of substantives are founded on the dis- tinction of the two sexes , and properly can only find place in the names of living crea- tures; all other substantives ought to belong to the neuter gender; but in all the European Languages, except the English, inanimate objects are also ranked under the distinction of mascu- line and feminine. In the Russian Language there are four genders: the masculine, feminine, neuter and common. The last includes such names as may be applied alike to either sex , ex. jiLflHHLja , a drunkard , xaima, a bigot &c. Case. The declension of substantives by Ca- ses is nothing but an expression of the re- lation , which one object bears to another , marked by some variation of the final letters of the word itself. 9. There are six cases in the Russian Lan- guage , which are called , i. the Nominative, HMC- 4- the Accusative, BIIHH- HiimejibHbiH naACHCb. mejibHbiii naAe>io. a. the Genitive, po^n- 5. the Instrumental , 3. the Dative, ^amejib- 6. the Prepositional, Hbir. Rem. The vocative case is omitted because it is like the nominative. $ io. The accusative singular of mas. substan- tives is like the genitive, when the substantive denotes an animate object, and like the nomina- tive, when an inanimate. The same rule applies to the accusative case of both masculine and feminine substantives in the plural number. ii. The prepositional case is only em- played after the following prepositions : o , o6-b , of. npn , by (near). eo , 6T> , in. no , after. na , on. 12. Russian substantives have eight termi- nations: a, e, H, o, *, i>, H, and Mfl, by which final letters the gender is determined. Those ending in * and H are masculine * Those ending in a , R , b t are feminine Those ending in o , e , and MX, are neuter. SECT. II. DECLENSION OF MASCULINE SUBSTANTIVES. Including the terminations & and u. I. DECLENSION OF THE MAS TERMINATION &. Sing. Animate. Inanimate. Norn. BOHH-TJ, a warrior. cmoji-Tj , a table. Gen. BOHH-a of a warrior, cmoji-a, of * The exceptions are noticed in each declension. ( '3 ) Dat.BoHH-y, to a warrior, cmo^-y , to Ace. Boim-a, a warrior. cmo.n>. Ins. BOMH-oMij , by or cmoji-oarb, by or with, with a warrior. Prep, o BOHR-* , * of or o cmo^-*, of about a warrior, V. 1 1. P I u. Norn. BOHH-M, warriors, cmo^-bi , tables. Gen. BOHH-OBTJ, of cmo^-oBij , of Dal. BoiiH-aMTs , to cmo^-aivnj , to ACC. BOHH-OBTj , eiHOJl-bl , Ins. BonH-aMH , by or cmoji-aMH , by or with. with. Prepo Bonn-axil , of. o cmoji-axt, of i3. Substantives ending in & , JRI , KI> , XT> , IT> , mi , and JM/Z. form the noni. plu. by changing the & of the sing, intow, instead of w, ex. He^iyn> , a disease, He^ym HOHti> , a knife, Hoatk , nojiKt , a regiment, HOJIKH , 4yxi> , a spirit, Ayxn ; Meq-b , a sword, Meqii ; epurb , a stone-pearch, epnin; ^eu;T>, fallow, jieinj*. V. 5. i4. Substantives ending in 041, CKT> , and OKI , preceded by a consonant , retrench e or * The prepositional case has no signification without a preposition; o, of, is therefore affixed as being most common- ly used with it, but B-B, in j na , on; npir, at or by, no af- ter, are also employed. C -4 ) o in the oblique cases, ex. omeirb, a father , gen. o TTTIJ a , pi- OHIUBI , omiieirb eic. the follow- ing however are exceptions to this rule : Kysneirb, a black-smith. 6oKi> , a side. aepeirb , a priest. Glrjieivb, a deserter. uopOKij, vice. jKHeirb, a reaper. pOKi>, (ale. yp6h"b , a lesson. 6mpoKT>, a youth. ga mbler. nepneirh , a monk. jKHeirb, jibcmeirb, a flntterer. wyApeirb,a philosopher. HOAJieirb , a rascal. npnujjieirb, a stranger. a reader. a stream. cpom> , a term. a pedestrian. *3AOK-b , a rider. 1 5. Substantives ending in eicb and eifb t preceded by a vowel, change e into H in the oblique cases , ex. pae'K-b, paradise (the highest seats in the theatre) panna etc. 6oeirb, a wrestler , 6oHi^a, Gormy etc. But when eKT> , or eip is preceded by Ji , e is changed into b, ex. Kyjieia>, a sack, an archer, cmptjihi^a etc. $ 16. The names of nations and conditions, ending in IIHT> , are declined irregularly in the plur : number. V. 58. 17. The following substantives end in , instead of bi in ilie nom. plu. and the accent falls upon the last syllable, to distinguish the nom plu. from the geii. sing. Ceperb , a coast. 6oKi> , a side. a city. a voice. , a bell. a meadow. a wood. a fur. jiyrb Gepera , coasts. Gona , sides. ropoAa , cities. rojioea , voices. KO^OKO-ia , bells. -* vr ^ > meadows. Jitca , woods. furs. , an island. OcmpoBa , islands. pora horns. porb , a horn. pyKaBi>, a sleeve. pyKasa , sleeves. CHtrb , snow. cntra , snows. cmpyrh , a plane. cmpyra , planes. 1 8- The following substantives are irregu- lar in the nom. gen. and dat. plu. having in these cases the terminations in , bee* and bRMi> t ex. Gparrrb , brother, nom. plu., Gpamwi, gen. 6paniLeBT> , dat. 6pyci> , a rafter. a rag. a husband. 6pycja , etc. , a c a pile. hair. JiyG-b , bark. a leaf. npymt , a. rod. npymi>H. C '6 ) ig. The following substantives are irre- gular in the cases marked : Eon,, God, vocative case, EOJKC ! Xpiicm6ci>, Christ, gen. Xpiicimi voc. Xpiicme ! , master , iiom. plu. rocno^a gen Apyn> t a friend , nom. plu. Apysbfl , gen , an eye , nom. plu. r^aaa , gen. , son, iiom. plu. cbiHOBba, gen. X03HHHTJ, host, iiom. plu. xosAeBa, gen , brother-in-law, nom. plu. gen T H E M E I. ON THE MAS. TERMINATION 2>. God is the creator of the world. The soul of man is immortal. Reason was given to man to control his passions. Happy is that youth , God , Borb. reason, paayivrb. is, ecmb. was given, ^ant. the creator, co3Aamejib. to control , ^a o6ys- the world , mipi. Mnia. the soul, ^yiiia. hispassions,cmpacmeir. man , ze*oeJ>KT>. happy is , cqacnuMBb. is immortal, GescMepm- that youth ; inoniTi RHIO- aa. uia. >7 who has found a true friend. Drunkenness im- pairs the understanding. Iron rubbed with the magnet always points to the North. Theology is a science , which treats of God. The peasant speaks of the plough and of sowing. Petersburg is one of the finest towns in Europe ; in this who , KomophiH. has found, Hainejib. * a true , Btpnaro. friend, jpyei. V. 10. drunkenness , iibflH- cmBO. impairs , oc.*a6UHenrb. the understanding,/**,?- CJTAOKT,. iron, JKCJTB30. rubbed , namepmoe. the magnet, always , points , to the north , na ct Theology, EorocjioBiH. is a science, ecmb nayKa. which treats, Komopaa pascyjK/j.aem'b. of,o, gov. the prep. case. the peasant , noce^A- H H HT>. speaks , roBopiiniij. of, o t gov. the prep. case, plough , nJiyzT** and , w. ^ sowing, nocte-b. St. Petersburg, C. He- mepGyprb. one , O-^HHTJ. of, H3i>, gov. the gen* case. the finest , KpacHB-feii- lUHXTj. town , zopoAT>. in Europe, BT> Espont. in this, BTJ ceMt, gov. the prep. * All active verbs govern the acsusative case. < '* ) there are many magnificent houses. Ex- perience is the teacher of fools. Curiosity at- tracts the human mind to new objects. Friend- ship is the mutual attraction of virtuous minds; wicked people have their accomplices of crime . lihertines their companions of licen- tiousness , misers their associates of avarice , city , there are , ecrab. many , MHOFO. magnificent , BCJIUKO- house , experience, onbinrb. the teacher , HacnraB- HIIKT). a fool, z.iyneuT>. V. i4 curiosity , juoGonbim- cmBO. attracts , B.aeqerirb. the mind , human , to, KT> , gov. the dat. liew , HOBblMTj. ohject , friendship, the mutual , attracton , of virtuous minds, wicked people , a have , (their, not expressed) accomplice, cooGmnnKi. V. i3. crime , nopoKi,. libertines , pacnymHbie. companion , coyzacm- HHKT>. licentiousness , pa3- cpdrrrb. miser , ^pe6poM^6mfb v. 14. associates, moiSpn'tueiu of avarice , Kopwcnm. ( -9 ) the vain their partners of ambition, the vir- tuous alone have friends. In Spring the earth is adorned with flowers. Jurisprudence treats of the laws. Luxury reigns in cities and sim- plicity in villages. the vain, cyemnbie. jurisprudence, rrpaBO- partners , cocmHsame- jieii. treats, of ambition, mujecjiaBifl. of, o, gov. the prep, alone, OAHH mojibKo. the law, saKOffb. the virtuous, AoGpoA*- in , BT> , gov. the prep. city , zopo^it. reigns , ijapcniByeiirb , or oGiimaernii. luxury , and , a. in villages , BTJ simplicity, npocmoma. have, friend, Apyz* > V. 19. in spring, BCCHOK). the earth , SCMJIH. is adorned, yKpauiaem- CH. flower , z/, to --- Ace. 3jvrB-eBT>. --- o6biqa-H , ----- Ins. 3?vrB-HMii,byorwith. o6biia-HMM, byorwith. Prep, o 3Mt-flXT> , of o oGwqa-ax-b , of -- 20. The names of all animated objects, end- ing in H, are declined as the first example, 3Mtia and of inanimate, as the second, oGbi- $ 2i. Some Nouns, terminating in eft, change e into & in the oblique cases ex. COJIOBCH , a nightingale , cojioBbH , cojiOBbio etc, MypaBeii, an ant, MypaBba , MypaBbio etc. ; yjieii , a bee-hive, yjiba , y^bio etc. 22. Monosyllabic nouns of inanimate objects, ending in it, which denote quantity, change this final in the genitive and prepositional cases singular into to , ex. poii , a swarm , poio ; i iaii, tea , qaw ; Kpaii , a border , Kpaio , etc. 28. Some nouns ending im n preceded by o are declined as adjectives (V. declension of adjectives) nopuiHoii, a tailor , nopranaro ; etc. THEME II. ON THE MAS TERMINATION U. Magnanimity is the characteristic of a true hero. Let us go to the rivulet to bathe. The gardener made a hive , in which he keeps a whole swarm of bees. Themistocles was banish- ed from his country by lot. Marriage was or- dained in Paradise. In Africa there are venomous magnanimity, BC^HKO- swarm , pon. the characteristic, CBOII- of bees , nqe.n. Themistocles , 0eMH- , of a true , kcmnHnaro. hero, zepon. let us go , noiiAe;vn>. to, KTJ, gov. the dat. the rivulet, pyzen. to bathe , Kyn the gardener , HHKTj. made , nocmpoiurb. a hive , yjieu,. in which, BT> Komopoarb. he keeps , a whole , was banished, H3rHam lot, irom his country, M3i> marriage, cynpyjKecmBo. was ordained , ycniano- BJICHO 6wao. paradise, pan. in, BT>, gov. the prep. Africa, AcjipuKt. there are , Bo venomous serpents. Never neglect any fit opportunities of acquiring knowledge. Death is terrible to the wicked. The ancient Egyptians worshipped serpents. The rain has penetrated the upper strata of the earth. The Tcmpean valley is wa- tered by numerous rivulets. The fame of Alex- ander the Great has resounded in all parts of the world. serpent , 3Mtii. never neglect , ne npo- nycKaif. any fit, y4,66HMXT> opportunity, cAy-taH* of acquiring, KI npno6>- ptmeHiM). knowledge , nosHaHiH. death , CMepmt. is terrible a wicked man , the ancient, ,ap an Egyptian , Eriinina- HiiH-b , V. 58. worshipped, o6o/Ka./in. the rain has penetrated , nann the upper , BepxHie. stratum , CAOH. of the earth , SCMJIH. the Tempean valley, TeMneilcKaa ^ojinna. is watered , opouiaeivia. by numerous, MHo the fame, caaea. the Great , has resounded, rpeMt^a. in all, BO Betvb, gov. the Prep. part , Kpan. of the world, SECT III. DECLENSION OF FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES. INCLUDING THE TERMINATIONS a, AANU a. I. Declension of the feminine termination a. Sing. Nom. icopoB-a, a 'cow. 3Bl>3A-a, a star. Gen. KopoB-w , of 3Bt34-bi , of Dat. KOpOB-t , tO SBliSA-'k ) tO Ace. KopoB-y, sBtSA-y , Ins. KopoB-oK) , by or 3Bt3A-oK> , by or with. L * J * J with. Prep, o KopoB-t , of o SB^SA-*, of P I u. Nom. KopoB-bi , cows. 3Bt3A-w , stars. Gen. KOpoa-T> , of SBfeSA-t , of ACC. KOpOB-Tj , ^B*3A-bI. Ins. KopoB-aMH , by or 3Bt3A-a3iw , by or with. with. Prep, o KOpoB-axij , of. o 3Bt3A-axT> , of. 24. By the above examples it will be seen, that the only difference in the declension of the animate and inanimate nouns ending in a is , that the ace. phi. of animated objects is like the genitive, and the ace. plu. of ina- nimate objects is like the jiom. C *4 ) $ 2$. All nouns terminating in sa , ma , Ka , xa , za , z*/a and lya , end in the gen. sing, and nom. plu. in n instead of w. V. 5. 26. Those , which end in JKO, , za , /*/Ka, severe cold, cmyaceio ; IJapHna , a queen, l^appii^eioj , a dark cloud, rayqeio ; ^yuia , the soul, ; poiqa~, a grove , pomeio. 27. Those, which end in mma, Kwa ,pza,pwa and iifa, form the gen. plu. by the termination en , ex. Boxcwa , a rein, BOHOKCM; ueKina, a squir- rel , BCKineH; napqa, gold-cloth, napnefij Bepraa, a basket, (used in catching fish^) Bepinenj po- ii^a, a grove , poujeii. 28. Those ending in Ka , preceded by JK , T , or ui , take e in the gen plu. ex. jioacna , a spoon , jioaceirb ; 66iKa , a cask , 66qein> ; nyuiKa, a cannon, nyineKi>. But when the ter- mination Ka is preceded by. any other Con- sonant , o is substituted in the place of e , ex Nom. sign. Gen plu. rapyGKa , a pipe. inpy6oKT>. A*BKa , a girl. , a tale. , a stick. , a ditch. manna , a cap. 6apKa , a barge. CapoKi>. AOCKU , a board. ymKa, a cluck. 29. When the termination na is preceded by b or n, the gen. plu. is formed by the ejection of those letters , and the insertion of e in their place, ex. jiiojiLKa , a cradle. JHOJICKTJ. HHHLKa, a nurse. HHHCKTJ. 6aHKa , baize. maiiKa , a band ftroop). 3o. The nouns, which end in 6a t za, Ma, HCI , pa, and ya , preceded by H , b , or any consonant except the gutturals e , K and x , take e , in the gen. plu. ex. cyAi>6~a f fate. cy^eGij. cepra , an ear - ring. ceperb. miopbMa , a prison. nnopeivrb. KaMMa , a selvage. KaeM-b. If the preceding consonant be one of the gutturals z , K , or x , the gen. plu. takes o instead of e , ex. a needle. a doll. S3 1. Those substantives ending in a, which fcy their signification belong to the male sex, as , BejUMOxca , a Lord ;] Boeco^a ; a military 2 chief, etc. are of the mas gen. but declined ' o as the examples given for the fern. THEME III. ON THE FEM. TERMINATION a. There is no rose without thorns. Who does not admire the works of Nature ? The Mont-Rosa is scarcely inferior in height to the Mont- bane. Labour preserves the strength and health. The ancient Romans despised riches and luxury. The Volga there is no , irbnrb. * Mont-blanc,MoH-6jiairb. rose , posa. in , BT> , gov. the prep, without, 6e3i>, gov. the height, ebimnnd. gen. labour , paGoma. thorn , niHiTb. preserves, yKptnjiAenrb. who does not, Kino He. the strength , cu^a. admire , y^MBJiflemca. . health , the works , A-EHcmBiflMTj. the ancient, nature, npnpo^a. Roman, PnM.*aHHHT> , the Mont-Rosa, ropa Posa V. 58. is scarcely , e^sa AH. despised , npeawpajiii. inferior , ycmynaenrb riches ; ntza. gov. the dat. luxury , pocKouifc. mountain, zopd. the Volga, Bo^ira. * Negations govern the geu. case. C *7 ) abounds with fah. Every thing in Nature pro claims the wisdom of the Creator. The Alpian. mountains are the highest in Europe. The Egyp- tians believed in the transmigration of souls. Before the invention of the compass, mariners steered their course by the stars. Hope sup- ports the minds of the unfortunate, Switzerland abounds, H3o6HJiyenrb , gov. the ins. fish , pLiGa. every thing, BCC. in, BT>, gov. the prep, nature , npupoga. proclaims, the wisdom , pocmb. the Creator, Tfiopeirb. the Alpian, AjmiiicKiH. mountain , zopd. are , cymb. the highest, BLico l iaii- inia. Europe , Eepona. an Egyptian, ErHimrfl- HMHTj. believed , in the transmigration nepecejieniio soul , dyiud. before the invention , 40 H3o the compass, mariner , steered, na their course, CBOC n^ia- Banie. by, TZO, gov. the dat. star hope , supports , niiiuaeiirb. the mind , Aywd. of the unfortunate, He- Switzerland , pin C s8 ) abounds in mountains and valleys. At the Olym- pic games the Greeks crowned the conquerors with wreaths of laurel. abounds, H3oGHjiyeim>. the Greeks , valley , AOJIUHO,, crowned , Blii at the Olympic, npn the conqueror s OjlHMIliMCKHXT) , gOV. the prep, with laurel, ^ game , mpd. wreath, BtHoirb, V. II. DECLENSION OF THE FEMININE TERMINATION A PRECEDED BY A CONSONANT. Sing. Norn. BorkH-fl , a God- Hy^-H , a bullet. dess. Gen. 6>orHH-n, of nyji-H , of Dat. Gorim-ii, to ny.i-15 , to Ace, GoriiH-io. nyji-H). Ins. 6oriiH-eio , by or nju-eio , by or with. with. Prep, o GoriiH-t ; of o nyji-t , of P I u. Nom. 6orliH-H Goddes- nyji-n , bullets, ses. Gen. 6oraH-b , of nyji-b , or nyji-e& , of. Dut. Gorkn-aMij to nji-flMT> to C 2 9 ) Acc. Gorhn-b. nyji-H. Ins. 6oraH-flMn , by or nyji-flMH , by or with. with. Prep, o GornH-flXij , of. o nyji-flxi , of 32. The substantives ending in Jin, and HR , preceded by b , ii or any consonant form the gen. plu. by the insertion of e between the two consonants , or changing b and M into that letter, ex. H, the earth. a tower. a water- trough. 33. The substantives ending in 4/r and pn , terminate in the gen. plu. in en , ex. 6ypa , a storm. 6ypen. aapa , the dawn. aapeit. Declension of the fern, termination A prece- ded by a vowel. Sing. Nom. jiHJii-a , a lily. ine-H , the neck. Gen. JiHjii-n , of iiie-n , of - Dat. .iHJii-n , to iiie-:fc,to Acc. jHjii-K>. uie-K). Ins.jiHJii-eio ; byorwith. me-eio , by or with. Prep, o jiH^ii-ii, of o ine-t, of * Co -\ / P I u. Nom. Jikii-ii , lilies. me-ii , necks. Gen. ^HJii-fi , of me-ii, of Dat. JlH.U-HMfc , tO Uie-flMTj , tO . Ins. Ahji'i-HMii , by or uie-jiMH , by or with, with. Prep, o Jiiijii-flx-b , of. o uie-ax-b , of The substantives ending in in are declined according to the first example , (Otujiia) and O i ' ^ J those ending in R preceded by any other vowel according to the second, (iiiea). 34. Some substantives ending in an. , as : Bce^eHHaa , the universe , are declined as fern, adjectives. 35. The following are of the mas. gender. /3,HAa, uncle. , a judge, an orator. THEME IV, ON THE FEM. TERMINATION O,. Hospitality, which among the nations of hospitality , cmpano- among, y , gov. the gen. npikMcmBO. nation , which proceded , npo- of antiquity, ( 3, ) antiquity, preceded from pure humanity, is now founded on the advantages of trade. Soldiers should be blindly obedient to the will of their Commander. Franklin invented a means of avert- ing lightning by a conductor. One moment rolls away after another , as wave after wave in the ocean of eternity. People accustomed to the luxuries of town find no pleasure in a village. from , pure humanity, qn cm a- ro qejioBtKOJiioGia. nOW , HblHt. is founded , OCHOBH- BaemcH. on , na, gov. the prep. advantage , Bbi.ro^a. trade , mopzoe^in. a soldier , should , blindly, cjiino. Le obedient, HOBHHO- will , GOJIR. of their commander, CBoero Franklin , invented, a means, of averting, omBpaiijami,. lightning , . by a conductor, rpoMO- BblMTi OIllBOOMli. one moment , MrHOBenie. rolls away , yraeKaemii. after another , sa AP) 7 - ( THM-b. wave , cmpyii. after, aa, gov. the ins. the ocean , iwope. of eternity, BtqHo people , JIK>AH. accustomed,npnBbiKinie to the luxuries, KT> poc- KOlIlIf. of town find no , He HHKaKoro. pleas ure,y40Bojii>cniBi/i. village ee C 3a ) A military commander should preserve presence of mind amidst the whistling of balls and the thunder of cannon. The establishment of schools J n the villages has contributed to the prospe- rity of Scotland. Africa includes many extensive deserts. Among the Russian poets Krilloff, Dmitrieff and Chemnitzer are celebrated for their a military Commander, should preserve , meirb coxpanflinb. presence ofmiiid, npn- cymcmBie Ayxa. amidst, cpe^n, gov. the ball , ny-JLR. (g en the thunder, rpoM-b. cannon , nyriiKa. the establishment, y- school , in , no , gov. the dat. village , AepeeHH. has contributed, cmBOBajio. to the prosperity , KI> Gjiarococmoflniio. Scotland, Africa , A(j)piiKa. includes , BT> many , MHorin. extensive , npocrapaH- HblH. desert , nycmtinsi. among, HSTJ , gov. the gen. the Russian, Poccific- KHXT>. poet , cnnixomBopei^-b , v. 14. Krilloff, Dmitrieff, Chemnitzer, XCMHH- are celebrated, npocjia- BH^iicb, gov. the ins. for their , CBOHMH. ( 33 ) fables. In different countries , different man- ners. fable , OO.CHH. country , in different , BT> pas- different , pasHbie. Hbixi>. manners, III. DECLENSION OF THE FEM. TERMINATION &. Sing. Nom. CBeKpoB-i), a mo- Pa^ocm-i , joy. ther-in-law. Gen. cBenpoB-H, of pa^ocm-H, of -- - Dat. cBeKpoB-n , to pa^ocm-H , to --- Ace. CBCKpoB-t. --- paAOCiub. --- -- Ins. cBCKpoBt-K) , by or pa^ocra-iio, by or with. with. Prep, o CBCKpoB-H, of. o pa^ocm-H , of P I u. Nom. CBCKpoB-n, mo- paAocra-n, joys. thers-in-law. Gen. CBCKpoB-en, of. paAOcnr-en , of -- Dat. CBenpOB-aiviij , to. pa^.ocm-flM'b , to --- Ace. Ins. cBCKpoB-flMH, by or pa^ocm-awH , by or with. with, Prep, o cBCKpoB-Hxij. of. o pa^ocm-ax-h, of -- $ 36'. Some of the substantives ending in *, which have either e or o in the last syl- ( 34 ) lable, eject these vowels in all the oblique ca- ses except the ins. ex. , a falsehood, gen. AJKH ins. jio , love. JIK>GBH j 87. When the final & is preceded by one of the palatals JK, t, ui , or iy , n is changed in the pin. into a, in the dat. ins. and prep, cases, ex. Hoib, night, dat.pl. Hoqawbjins. plu.HoqaMH,&c. 38. The letter &, is frequently retained in the ins. sing, instead of being changed into i, ex. jiecmb flattery , aecmbio or jiecmiio qecmh honour, qecmbio. 89. The words Mann. , mother , and Aoqb 9 daughter are augmented in the oblique cases by the syllable ep 9 ex. wamb, mother, gen. Mamepn &cc. THEME V. ON THE FE-M. TERMINATION b. Health is the fruit of temperance. Child- hood is the happiest period of life. Virtue health, 3Aop6fiie. the happiest, cqacnuik- the fruit , njio/j,*. temperance , yutipeH- period , HOCHJb. life , JRH3Hb. childhood, MjiaAenqe- virtue CJQBO. ( 35 ) is preferable to riches , friendship to flattery and utility to pleasure. An indolent man is a burden to himself. Liberality should be tem- pered by prudence. Asia was the cradle of the human race. If thou wouldst be virtuous, reflect often upon death. Justice is the first of virtues. It is dangerous to give ourselves is preferable , riches , GoramcmBo. friendship, 4py>KecniBO. flattery , Jiecmb. and utility , a pleasure, cmse. a man indolent , to himself, caMi> ce6t. is , 6bJBaenrb. BT>, gov. the ace. burden , m/izocmb. liberality, should be , tempered , prudence , Asia, Asia. was, 6w.*a, gov. the ins. the cradle , race , po,4i>. human , if, thou wouldst, be virtuous, Gbimb reflect, pasMbiJujuiji. often , qacmo. upon , o , gov. the ins. death , cMepmb. justice , npaBocy^ie. is , ecrab. the first, nepsaff. of, H3i> , gov. the gen. it is dangerous, onaciio. o ' to give ourselves up , ( 36 ) up to unbounded passions. The contemplation of nature inspires grand ideas. Reason is very often obscured by the passions. There are some extraordinary geniuses , who have distin- guished themselves in all branches of human knowledge. to unbounded, HeyM*- extraordinary, neoGbiK- peHHbIMT>. HOBCHHbie. passion , cmpacmb. genius , yMT>. the contemplation, co- who have distinguish- 3epu,anie. ed themselves, npo- inspires, BHymaenrb. caaBHBiniecfl. grand , BejikiecmBeH- HblH. in all , BO BC-fcXT) , gOV. idea , MbicAb. the prep, very often , qacmo. branch , etmeb. reason, pasyMT>. of human knowledge, is obscured, nompa- qeaosliqecKiix^ noa- qaeracfl. Kama, there are , ecrab. $ 4 Although b be a fern, termination , the number of mas. Substantives ending in this sign is considerable. To the following list must be added all the nouns , which termi- nate in mejib , except, Ao6poj.imejib, virtue; o6aineju>, abode j apiaejiL , a company (of work- men) ; and Memejib, a whirlwind (snow - storm) which are feminine. List of words ending in ft, which are of the masculine gender. Ajimapb , an altar. Kyjib , a bag. (sack). ByKsapb , a spelling- .Aarepb , a camp, book, lanomb, a sandal. ("made of the bark of the birch) the elbow, an almond. MnmKUb, muslin. Monacmbipb , a mona- stery. Hauiambipb , sal ammo- OroHb, lire. niac. llenb, a trunk (of a tree). Hepe'icHb, recapitula- tion. TlepcmeHb , a ring. , a flame, a bladder. , a hurdle. Ilymb , a way. PeeeHb , rhubarb. , a strap, fa , a rouble. , a rudder. , a whirlwind. Bonjib , a groan. FBo3/3;b , a nail. FpeGeHb , a comb. Fpys/^b , a mushroom, /^eromb , tar. ,4eHb , day. , a gland. , an animal. , ginger. KajieHAapb, an almanack. KaMCHb , a stone, a cough, jelly. Koswpfa , a trump. KoHb , a courser. Kopa6^b, a ship. KopeHb , a root. Kocapb , a cutlass. a flint. a cuke. , hydromel. oHapi> , a lantern. Cjiouaph, a dictionary. ^nrfejib, hops. Cme6e^b , stubble. Xpycma^j, , chrystal. Cyxaph , a rusk. IIJaBe^b , sorrel. , coal. IHe6eHb , rubbish. , an eel. ^Kopb , an anchor. umiuib , the wick of -flmnapb, yellow amber, a candle. JlqivieHb , barley. $ 4i. The names of the months, which end in b are also masculine , as well as the names of dignities , occupations &c. belonging ex- clusively to the male sex. as: Kopo^b , a King; , a guide; yqiirnejib, a school-master &c. Declension of substantives terminating in b, which are of the masculine gender. Sing. Nom. E[ap-b , a King. KOpa6ji-b, a ship. Gen. LJap-fl of K0pa6ji-a , of Dat. I^ap-K) , to Kopa6ji-io , to Ace. I^ap-A. Kopa6ji-b. Ins. LJap-eivrb , by or Kopa6ji-eMi>, by or with. with. Prep, o IJap-li, of o KOpa6ji-t, of - P I u. Nom. IJap-H, Kings. KOpa6^-ii , ships. Geu. Hap-eja, of Kopa6ji-en , of Dat. Hup-AM*. tO-*- KOpalM-JIM'b, tO ( 3 9 J Acc. Ifap-ea. --- Kopa6^-ii. ---- Ins. tyip-flMM, by or Kopa6ji-flMn, by or with. with. Prep, o I{ap-flx:b , of o KOpa6^-Axi>, of -- THEME VI. ON THE SUBSTANTIVES ENDING IN b, WHICH ARE MASCULINE. Vain is the endeavour of an author to please the taste of all his readers. The scholar should be obedient to his teacher. The south of Russia produces in great abundance barley , buck-wheat, oats and every kind of grain. vain, mujeniHoe. endeavour, yckjiie author, to please , gov. the dat. taste , UKyeb. of all his , BCBXT* CBO- HXT>. reader, znmdmejib. the scholar, Should , be obedient, HOBHHO- j, ^ov. the dut. to his, CBoewy. teacher , yiumejib. the south of Russia , JOiKHaH PoCClH, produces, nponsBo^nnn* in great. BT> BCJIHKOMTJ. abundance , H3o6iiJiiii. barley, jitMeHb. buck-wheat, npoco. every kind, grain, pacmt- mx. Rurick was the founder of the Russian Empire. The enemy devastated all the towns and villa- ges with fire and sword. Chancellor, an En- glishman , having sailed (in a ship ) to the shores of the White Sea established the first commercial intercourse with Russia. Conquerors overthrow in one year , what it required ages to establish. In England Rurick, PK>PMKT>. was , Ghu-b, gov. the ins. the founder , ocnoed- of the Russian Empire, PoccincKaro Focy^ap. cmBa. the enemy, devastated , onycmo- a ship, to, KT>, gov. the dat. shore , 6epen>. established , aaBejrb. the first , neputiH. commercial, moproBwa, intercourse , cuaab. witliRussiajCbPoccieio. Conqueror , saeoeed- all, EC*. town, ropOAT>. V. 17 villages , cejia. fire , oeoHb. sword , Mezb. an Englishman, AHIUH n one year , BT> OAHHT> Chancellor, having Bailed, npi in, ttu, gov. the prep overthrow, ncnpoBep- raionni. what , mo qmo. required to establish , yqpeauaeraca gov. the inst. age , BtKly. England , c 4i ; there are many distinguished writers. Russian peasants wear sandals , made of the Lark of the birch , instead of shoes. A child shews gra- titude to its parents by obedience and respect. The Egyptians were the teachers of the Greeks in arts and sciences. In the middle ages , learn- ing flourished only in the monasteries. there are many , amoro gov. the gen. distinguished, writers , nucamcjib. Russian , PoccificKie. peasant, KpecnTb/iHHHT> V. 58. wear, Hocanrb. instead of shoes, BM*- cmo 66yBn. sandal-, Jidnomb V 36. made, iL/iemeHbie. Of, H3T>. the bark of the birch, GepesoBoii Kopw. a child , AHmfl. shews , OKa3biBaerm>. to its, CBoiiflTb, gov. the dat. parent, obedience , noKop- HOCmb. respect , noqraenie. Egyptian, ErliimuiHiiHTj V. 58. were , Gbijin , gov. the Ins. teacher , yzumejib. a Greek, FpeKT>. in, BT>, gov. the prep. science , arts, learning, yqenocrab. in the middle ages , BT, flourished , only in , Bt OAHHXT> mo^i.KO. monastery, Monacmbipb. ( 42 ) SECT IV. DECLENSION OF NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES. INCLUDING THE TERMINATIONS o , e, AND JUA. 4 2 ' The accusative case of all neuter substan- tives , both sing, and plu. is like the nominative. I. DECLENSION OF THE NEUTER TERMINATION o. Sing. Plu. Nona, sepnaji-o , a loo- sepnaji-a, looking-glas- king - glass. ses. Gen. 3epKa^-a, of 3epKaji-T>, of Dat. sepnaji-y , to sepKaji-aMT> , to Ace. sepnaji-o. sepKaji-a, Ins. 3epKaji-oMT>, by or 3epKa^-aMn, by or with. with. Prep, o sepnaji-t, of o sepKa.i-axij , of 43. Substantives ending in o preceded by two consonants , take the letter e or o between the two consonants in the gen. plu. ex. , a pail. , a spot. cyKHO , cloth. cyKOHi>. Exceptions. rirtsAO , a nest, rniiS^Tj. ropjio , the throat. ropjrb. Macjio , oil. Mac.A:b. o , a trade. C 43 ) $ 44. Ilepo , a pen; nojiimo , a log; a wingj and AepeBo, a tree, terminate in J>H , j>eBT> and LHM-b, in the nom. gen. and dat. plural. 45. The following are irregular in the cases marked : 3jio , an evil , gen. plu. sojrb. HeGo, heaven, nom. plu. neGeca, gen, HeGecrb &:c. OKO , the eye , nom. plu. 6qn , gen. oieii 8cc. IL^eio, the shoulder, nom. plu. njieqn ; gen. n^eq-b &:c. , a vessel, (ship) nom. plu. cyAa, gen. : but when it denotes an urn , vase , or other vessel made to contain liquids , it is declined regularly. , a body (celestial) nom. plu. nrfejia and nrkieca, gen. nrfejrb and nrfejiec'b &c. But when it denotes the body of a living crea- ture , it is declined regularly. O , the ear, nom plu. yinii , gen. yinen Sec. a miracle, nom. plu. qy4,eca gen. qyAec-b &c. , an apple , nom. plu. ^GJIOKH , gen. ( 44 ) THEME VII. ON THE NEUTER TERMINATION O. Much iron is exported from Russia. It is healthy to rise early in the morning. Labour and exercise strengthen the body. A truly great man unites modesty with merit. The Mexican mines abound in gold and silver. Or- der requires , that every thing should be kept from, MSI,. Russia, Poccia. is exported, much, MHoro, gov. the gen. iron , jicejitso. to rise , BcmaBamb. early , pano* in , no , gov. the dat. the morning , ympo. is healthy , 3AopoBO. Labour , mpy^. and, n. exercise , pi. strengthen great unites, coe/i,HH/iemib. modesty, cKpoMHocmB. with, CT>, gov. the inst. merit, AocmonHcmeo. the Mexican, MCKCH- K>nTb. the body , TTJ-BJIO. a truly , HCHIHHHO. mine, py,4,HHKi>. abound , in , expressed by the ins. case. gold , 30JIOJJ1O. silver, cepcGpo. order , nopflAOKij. requires , mpeGyemij. that, mnoGbi. every thing,BcAKaaBeii;b, should be kept, xpa- C 45 ) . in its proper place. The most simple means are frequently the best. Sometimes important events proceed from insignificant causes. Modesty belongs to the most attractive qualities of the female sex, Socrates excelled all his fellow citizens in the qualities of his understanding and heart. Eloquence does not consist in high- flown expressions, but in strong feelings. in , na , gov. the prep, its proper, CBOCMTJ. place , Mtcmo. mean , cpe^cmeo. the most simple , ca- Mtm up o cm LI a. are frequently , cymb qacmo. the best, caMbia jtyiuiiH. sometimes , HHor^a. from, om'b, gov. the gen. insignificant, cause , proceed , important , Belinda, event , belongs, to , KT> , gov. the dat. the most attractive, npii- quality , cGoncmeo, of the female, sex , nojtb. Socrates , CoKparnij. excelled, npeBOcxo/i.H.i'b. all his , BCl}Xb CBOHXl). fellow-citizens, corpaac- quality, Kazecmeo. understanding , yMT>. heart, cep^ije. eloquence, ixpacHopiiie does not consist , He cocmoHnrb. high-flown , BWCOKO- expressons , butin, HOBij,gov. the pr. strong, feeling , C 46 ) If. DECLJGKSION OF THE NEUTER TERMINATION e. Sing. Nom. jinq-e , the face. Miituie , an opinion. Gen. anu,-a of MHtni-a , of Dat. juiij-y , to Miiiiiii-K) , to ACC. JlHI^-6. MHliH-ie. Ins. jimj-eiyrb , by or MirbHi-eMi) , by or with. with. Prep, o jinj;-t, of o Mutm-ii , of P I u. Nom. jikij-a , faces. Mirfcni-H , opinions. Gen. jinij-1) , of MHtni-fi, of Dat. jiHLj-aivrb , to MHXHi.jirtb, to. ACC. JlHi;-a. MHtHl-H. Ihs.JiHi5-aMH,by or with. MirfcHi-Hivni , by or with. Prep. ojiHi^-axia, of o MHtni-flXT}, of 4^- Substantives ending in e preceded by a consonant are declined according to the first example, as: COJIHIJC , the sun cep^i;e, the heart &cc , and those ending in the same letter preceded by a vowel , according to the second, as: s^ame, a building &c. 47. Substantives ending in pe , Jie , and ic change a into a in the genitive, and y into 10 in the dative , ex. Nom. Gen. Dat. Phi. Mope the sea, Mopa Mopro wopa. ( 47 ) _ nojie a field , HOJIH HOJIIO nojiii. jKHJibe an abode, JKMJibH aruuibK) anuibH. 48. Those ending in i^e , preceded by a consonant, take the letter e in the genitive plural , between the consonant and ^ , ex. cepAije , the heart cepeirb. The soft sign , & is also changed into e , -in the plu. when it precedes the 140 of the nominative sing. a rng. 49- Substantives ending in be , terminate in the gen. plu. either in beet , or en, ex. Konbe , a lance. Konbem> or Konen. py/Kbe , a musket. pyiKbeBi. or py?Ke&. 5o< Those ending in oe are declined as neuter adjectives (V. dclension of adjectives). THEME VIII. ON THE NEUTER TERMINATION 6. Man's fate depends in a great measure on fate , cyAbGa. depends , man, HeaoBtKi. upon, onrb ; gov. the in a great measure , gen. ( 48 ) his own conduct. A man destitute of a grate- ful heart is incapable of a virtuous action , To praise a man to his face , is to accuse him of vanity. The path of virtue is the road to peace. Habit destroys imagination. The consolation of religion is our surest refuge in misfortune. It is glorious to die on the field his own, coGcmBeimaro ero. conduct, noee^enie destitute , neiiMliioiqiH a grateful , 6jiaro,4ap- naro. heart , cep^e. is incapable, necnoco- 6'em>. of a virtuous, KI> ,406- action , nocmynoKi>. to praise , XBajiiunj). to , B-L , gov. the ace. face , JIM ye. is , SHaminrb. to accuse , ynpeKamb. him, ero. of, BT>, gov. the prep. vanity , the path , craesn. is the road, ecrafc nymb. peace , cnoKoucmeie. habit, destroys , imagination , eoofrpa- the consolation , ymt- uienie. religion , Btpa. is , Gbioaenrb , gov. the ins. surest, refuge , fi in , Bt , gov. the prep. misfortune , neczdcmic. it is glorious, cjiaBHO. to die , yMepcmb. on , Ha , gov. the prep. field ; node. ( 49 ) of battle , fighting in defence of our native country. In prosperity we should display mo- deration , in misfortune patience. The minds of youth are open equally to good or Lad impressions. The rising of the sun at sea is one of the most majestic spectacles in nature. Pre- judice blinds the eyes with unsubstantial visions. battle , Gk fighting, in defence of , sa, gov. the ace. our native country , prosperity, czdcmie. we should , AO display, moderation, nie. misfortune , neczd- cmie. patience , mepirfeHie. the mind , cep^me. of youth , IOHOLUCH. equally , paBHo. are open , omBepcrnw. to , ^JIH , gov. the gen. good , xy- and bad , n impression , enezam- the rising, the sun , at, na, gov. the prep. sea, Mope. is one , ecmb O/J.HO. of, Mai* , gov. the gen. the most majestic, BC- spectacle , prejudice , npe^pascy. blinds , the eye, rja3i> (V. unsubstantial, nycinw- Hif. vision, npnenAtiHie. 3 A virtuous man finds in his own sentiments a recompense for all the changes of the world. virtuous, finds , in, BT> , gqv. the prep, his own coGcmBCH- a recompense , B^ernnopeHie. for all , sa Bel). change, npeBpam- . Hocmb, HbixT> CBOHXT>. the world, Nipt. sentiment, qyecmBOBanie. III. DECLENSION OF THE NEUTER TERMINATIONS MA AND 1UR. Sing. Nom. BpeM-fl, time. Gen. BpeM-eHH , of Dat. BpeM-enii, to -- Ace. P I u. BpeM-CHa, times. speM-em , of ---- BpeM-enaM-b , to --- BpeM-eHa. ----- Ins. BpeM-eneMfc, hy or BpeM-enaMH, by or with. with. Prep, o BpeM-eHii, of o BpeM-eHaxi>, of --- $ 5i. The substantive AHHIH , a child is neuter in the singular , and masculine in the plural, and is declined as follows. Sing. PI u. Nom. Awni-H, a child. A*ni-H , children. Gen. AHm-aniH , of ^trn-ea , of --- Dat. uim-mnH to -- Alirn-Aarb to ---- ' X" "^ C *' Ins. ^Hm-^rneMV n 411- A^HI-I>MH , by or with. jn-AmeK), by or with. Prep, o Hin-.Hniw,of ^trn-Axij, of THEME IX. ON THE NEUTER TERMINATION MJt. But few people know to estimate the value of time. The greater part of the inhabitants of Russia belong to the Slavonian race. The Cru- saders after surmounting great obstacles , suc- ceeded in planting their banner on the walls but few , people, know to estimate the value , the greater part , iiiaa qacmb. inhabitant , of Russia , Pocciio. belong, npimaAjeHdinrb. t o , Kii , gov. the dat. the Slavonian , CjiaBHH- CKowy. race , after surmounting, no- cjit , gov. the gen. great , BCJIIIKHXI*. obstacle , npenaincnT- Bie. a Crusader , Kpecmo- HOCCI^Ti. succeeded in planting , banner , on , Ha , gov. the prep. wall ; C 5* ) of Jerusalem. We should not despair even under the burden of misfortunes. O times \ O manners! ach of the seasons of the year has its charms. History hands to posterity the names of great men. The enemy entered the town with unfurl- ed banners. We have hut little knowledge of the tribes inhabiting the interior of Africa. Jerusalem, IepycajiH]\rb. we should not despair, He even , under, no/rb , gov. the inst. burden , 6peMn. misfortune, necmcmie. time , manner, each, of, MSI, , gov. the gen. season , epeMH. the year has , HMt its , CBOH. charm , history , ncmopia. hands , npeAaenrb. posterity , name , UM/I. of great men , Kiix-b My/Ken. the enemy, Henpinmejib. entered , Bcmynkjrb Bb town , ropo^ii. unfurled , pacnyii;eH- ii hi Mir. banner , 3H,a.Mn. we have , MM HMteMi. but little , Majio. gov. the gen. knowledge , iiSBtcmie. of , o , gov. the prep. tribe , mteMsi. inhabiting , nacejiAio- the interior, BHyrnpeii- Africa, ( 53 ) PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON THE declension of substantives. Finland. Here is the reign of winter. In the begin- ning of October every thing is covered with snow. The neighbouring hill scarcely shews its sterile summit, and the hoar-frost falls like a thick cloud. On the first frosty morning the trees glitter like a rainbow, reflecting the solar rays here , the reign , winter , SUM a. the beginning, October, every tiling, BCC. is covered , noKpwmo. snow , scarcely , neighbouring, hill , cKtuid. shews, sterile , summit , eepwuna. the hoar-frost, HHCH. falls , like , BT> BH^t, gov. the gen. thick , rycmaro. cloud , 66jiaKo. on, npn , gov. the prep. first, nepBOMi>. frosty morning, yrnpen- a tree , glitter, 6jiHcmatonrb. like , expressed by the ins. case. a rainbow, pdjyza. reflecting, solar, co a ray ( 54 ; in a thousand beautiful colours. But the sun seems to look upon the desolation of winter with horror^ he scarcely makes his appearance and is again buried in the darkyo^, the fore- runner of severe cold. The moon continues all night long to spread her silver learns , and traces her circle in the azure vault of hea- ven , along which from time to time dart in a thousand , mii- cRZbJo , gov. the gen. beautiful , npiAmHbixt. colour , iiGtwb. seems , KaacemcH. horror, fwac'b. to look , BSHpaenrb. upon, na. the desolation, onycmo- wenie. makes his appearance, and again , H yjKe. is buried, norpyHeeno. dark , GarpoujuJf. fog , myMdn-b. the fore-runner, severe cold , cmyxa. the moon , continues all nightlong, BT> raeqenie BCCH noqu. to spread, H3JiMBaenrb. silver , cepeGpeHiiwe. a ray, Jiyfb. her, CBOH. traces , oGpasyenrb. circle , KpyzT> , (to be put in the plu.) in , Ha. azure vault, qiicmon ^a- sypii. of heaven , along , no. which , KomopoH. from time to time , dart, npo.iemaK)iirb. ( 55 ) glaring meteors. Not the least breath of wind agitates the trees , white with the hoar -frost-. a melancholy, but a pleasing scene! What unu- sual stillness ! the timorous deer hies fearfully to the thicket , shaking the icicles from his ant- lers , the pheasants doze securely in the deep silence of the forest , and every step of the traveller is "beard in the snowy wilderness. glaring , 6jiecmfliu,ie. a meteor, Memeop-b. not , HH. the least , MaJti>8inee. a breath , wind , agitates, He KOJi a tree , jepeeo. white , hoar - frost , li melancholy, neqajitnoe. pleasing, npinmnoe. scene , 3piuniu,e. what unusual , KaKaa HeoGbiKHOBCHHaa. stillness , mmimna. timorous , poGnaa. deer , jiaub. fearfully , mopoiiKO. hies , npoGnpaemca. the thicket, shaking , ompacaa. from , CT> , gov. the gen. antler , jyoet. his , CBOHXT*. the icicles, o^ie^eHtJibiM HHCH. the pheasants, cma^o mernepeBCH. doze , Apewjiemij. securely, Geaonacno. deep , rjiyGoKOH. silence , mttiunnd. the forest, jitcT>. every, BC/IKOH. step , in art. traveller, cmpdHHHK'b. is heard cjbiineH'b. snowy CH-BJKHOM. wilderness , n C 56 ) Yet even here nature smiles with a cheerful, though transitory smile. When the snow is dissol- ved by the warm summer breeze and the hright rays of the sun when the waters have run their noisy course to the sea , and formed thousands of rivulets and thousands if cascades, then na- ture arises from her heavy and protracted slumber suddenly the wintry fields are clothed yet even here , HO 11 S^liCh. nature , npiipo^a. smiles , yjibi6aemcH. cheerful , sece^oio. though , HO. transitory , KpamKOK). a smile , when , snow, cHtzij , (to be put in the plu ) V. 17. is dissolved, pacmaajiH. by , onrh , gov. the gen. warm , menjiaro. summer , breeze , bright , A water , eo^d. their noisy course , ci> UiyMOMT* have run , yrneKjiii. to , &b , gov. the ace. the sea , mope. and formed, oGpasoBaBi* a thousand , a rivulet , pyzeii. a cascade , 6040110.41. arises , Bbixo^iirmj. from , H3i>, gov. the gen. heavy, marocrnnaro. protracted, iipo^ojiJKH- mejbHaro. slumber, ycbinAenie. suddenly , BApyr"b. wintry, OSHMWH. a field , nojie. are clothed, o^tBaioin- ca. in green, the meadows with aromatiok flowers. Yesterday all was dead, to day every thing blossoms and sends forth grateful odours. Batushkoffs letters. in green, sejieHbiivrb 6ap- all, BCC. xamoMT>. was dead, GbijioMepniBO. a meadow, jiyrb.V. 17. to day, cero^HH. aromatick,AymHcmbiMM. blossoms , u,BtmenTb. a flower, iietrm,. sends forlh grateful yesterday , Biepa. odours, fciaroyxaenrb. ( 58 S 5 H s S 1 = M s a V 5 [P re rt ? rs S 33 53 * S B5 K 3 S s ^ * i ^ 0> 4^ OJ 0, > * ( a .0 w J 2 w a , a s x 55 )^ CN B; ec c a V C * 5 tO g n s S X s w o rt ^ O O & rt Q rt rt ! C3 O rt K * ta s^ a C6 *w fa 2 ; rt rfj ^q >-, o * UP ^5 CS A CC C3 O 5 * , a man; jKena, a woman; CWHTJ, a son; 4,011,, a daughter; Gapaifb a ram; OBQ,a a ewe &c. and secondly by varying the termination of the masculine ap- pellation. 52. The polysyllable mas. appellations, end- ing in 6-b , , 2i> , AT> , Jtit , p-b , 7T7&, and JT* , form the feminine by changing T> into Ka, and the guttural x into z*/ ; ex. , a neighbour , fern. coc*Ka. , a soldier, --- co^i^arnKa. nacrayxt , a shepherd, nacinyiiiKa. Excepions to this rule. , an eayle , fem. op^Jiija. , a goat , -- KO3a. noeapii , a cook , -- noBapnxa. oceMi> , an ass , -- $ 53. The monosyllable mas. appellations en- ding in*, change this termination, into o6Ra\i\ the feminine ; ex. ( 60 , a canary-bird Monrb , a opeiidthrift MomoBKa. Exceptions to this rule. Fpacfrb , a Count , fern, Fpacjuma. BOJIKTJ , a wolf, Bojiiiiua. BHyK-b, grand-son. BHyna. a reaper, jKHiiqa. a priest, 5Kpiii;a. , a lion, , a liar, , a slave , CJIOHT>, an elephant, cjioniixa. mpycrb, a coward, mpyckxa. inymt, a jester, uiymkxa. 54. Foreign appellations of ranks , titles , professions &c. adopted in the Russian lan- guage , and which end in a or 6 change these terminations into ma ; ex. , FeHepajTb , a General , fern. FeHepa^bina. Maiopi> , a Major, Maiopma. anmeKapL, an apothecary, anraeKapina. Exceptions to this rule. Hivmepainop'b, an Emperor, fern. HMJiepanrpHija, Fepijorb , a Duke , Fepi^oriiHa. Bapon-b , a Baron , Baponecca. , a monk, ( 6, ) $ 55. Those ending in me Jib form the femi- nine by the addition of Hiiya ; ex. , a benefactor, -- 6jiaroA*niejii- H H n,a. , a traitor, 56. Those ending in n form the feminine by the addition ol KO, ; ex. , a malefactor , fern. , a rascal, -- Exceptions to this rule. repoit , a hero , fern. repoiiHa. atreasurer, - KasHaies. SECT. VI. NATIONAL APPELLATIONS. $ 5y. National appellations are formed from the names of countries , provinces and cities> and terminate in the mas. in eip or nm> and in the fern, in , na t anna , zna 9 or zanxa, ex. Illoni- ifl , Scotland, IIlomjiaHei;!*, a Scotchman, , a Scotchwoman. Mas. Fern. Eepona, Europe, Esponeeirb , EeponeHKa. ABCinpi/i, Austria , ABCinpiei^ , ABcnipiflHita Spain, HciuiHei^ij , HcnaHKa. C <>* ) Mas. Fern. ia, Switzerland, America, AMcpiiKaHeu/b, Minajia, Italy, Minajuaiieirb , Pbccja, Russia, POCCIHHMHT*, PocciaHKa. Aflr^ia, England, AnrjHMaHHH"b, /3,aHia, Denmark, ^anmaHHiTb , Ilepcia , Persia, nepciaHMHTi, IlepciaHKa. PHMI>., Rome, PHMJIJIHHH^ , Apaeia , Arabia, ApaBPtmaHMHTj, Taniapia , Tartary , TamapHHij, TamapKa. The following have irregular terminations. in, France , paHijy3i> Tpeijia , Greece , TpeKi> , TepMaHia, Germany, TepManeiyb, FepiviaHKa II 6.1 i>iii a , Poland, nojiflirh , Turkey, TypOKi, , , Kamtchatka, 58. National appellations ending in nut. are declined regularly in the singular, and as follows in the plural. Nom. AHrjiiiqaHe , Englishmen. Gen. AnrjiHqairb, of ---- Dat. AHr.dM'iaHai\n> , to --- Ace. AHi\ui4anij. ------ C 63 ) Ins. AHr.iM l iaHaMH , by, or with. Prep, o AHrMMqaHaxb , of SECT VII. PATRONYMICK APPELLATIONS. 59. Patronymick appellations are derived from the paternal name , and added to that of the son or daughter. The Greeks and the Romans had their patronymicks , and it is probable, that the English, and other Nor- thern nations also made use of them before every family had its own peculiar name. Whence many such appellations, as : Peterson, Johnson , Thomson &c. have passed down to posterity as family names from the last person, who bore them as pafronymicks , and whose father's name must have been Peter , lohn or Thomas. At present , among the Russian pea- santry the common method of distinguishing persons of similar Christian names is by adding that of the father; as Hemp* Mfia- HoBH , or @OMHHI>, John Thomas'sou or the son of Thomas. It must not however, be mferied horn this C 64 ) that patronymick appellations are confined to the lower orders or such, as have no family name , on the contrary it is ihe usual manner of addressing persons of all classes. 60. Russian patronymick appellations are formed from proper names by the addition of oenz-b , eewc-b and HZT> for the Mas. and oena , e6na and H.WHCL , for the feminine; ex. AJICK- caii^pi) llBaHOBHTb , Alexander the son oflohn, from MBan-b , lohn ; ^v^nrpiS Dmitrius the son of Alexis, from, Alexis ; HKOBT> oivinqij , James the son of Tho- mas , from 0OMa , Thomas. Anna A.ieKcaH^- poBHa , Ann the daughter of Alexander from AjieKcaH^pij; Mapifl A^eKcteBHa, Mary the daugh- ter of Alexis, from A^eKciiii; EnaraepHHa 0o- MiiuiHa , Catherine the daughter of Thomas , from Oowa. &c. 6 1. In familiar conversation the termina- tions o6H.ii and eemi are generally contracted into biii> and nm , as A^eKcau,4pbiqi> , SECT VIII. AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 62. . Augmentatives are derivative substan- tives , which by some addition made to their termination express the object , as of greater than ordinary size; as ^oiUHii^e , a, mansion, from AOMt , a house. 63. Augmentatives in the Russian language terminate in iiiye and niya. 64- Substantives ending in T> , & and it form their augmentatives by changing these terminations into iiiyc ; ex. ^GMT* , a house , 40- MHii;e , a great house ; rB03Ai> ? a nail , rnoa- AHu;e , a great nail; capaii , a shed, capanii^e, a great shed. 65. The neuter substantives ending in o change o into niye ex. OKHO , a window, OK- $ 66. The feminine substantives , ending in a, n and b change these terminations into wye , when the substantive expresses an animate object, and into niya , when an inanimate; ex. 6a6a, an old woman, 6a6nin,e; ^ana, a paw,Jiank- ii;a; GaHfl, a bath, ( 66 ) 67. Those substantives which are only em- ployed in the plural number form their aug- mentatives in n^n , ex. cana , a sledge, ca- qacw , a clock , Rem. When the gutturals, 2, K or x happen to be the final consonants, they are changed into the palatals xt , z; and m ; ex. canorb , a boot , canoHckiqe; crnapiiirb, an old man, cinapHqkii^e ; Gpioxo, the belly , 6pK>uikiu,e. 68. Diminutives are derivative substantives, which by some variation in their termination express the object as of less than ordinary size ; as arHCHOKi), a lambkin; iejiouiJHKT, a mani- kin , or little man. 69. Russian diminutives are of two kinds: caressive and contemptuous ; ex. AOMTJ. a house, /j,6\iHKTj, a pretty little house, and AOMHUJKO a miserable hut. 70. Diminutives are of the same gender as their primitives, with a few exceptions. Masculine Diminutives. 71. Substantives ending in &, preceded by 6 , 6 , M , w, or , a mushroom, rpnGoirb , a little mushroom; ocmpoBi> , an is- land , ocrapoBOKi? , a little island. E x c e p t i o n s. POBI>, a ravine, pooiiK-b. qepHocjiHB-b , a prune , a lion, jieBHKb. Ka(J>mairb , acoat,Ka(J>- maHeirb. aajiHBTj, a gulf, sajinBeirb. AOMTJ, a house , AOMHKTJ. 72. Substantives ending in a , preceded by xe r t, w, m, .*, n, p, or //7, change, ^ into HKT> ' ex. HO/KIJ , a knife , HOJKttiTb. craoJi^,atable J cm6^HK'b. , a ball, MHqiiKi>. cnom>, an ear (of corn) aiUTj , a hut , niajia- cuonHKij. uiHKij. mnp-b , a ball, ruapiiKi). , a mantle, n^ia- Kpecm^, a cross, Kpe- Exceptions. , a flower, i;Bt- Jincmi), a leaf, , a hammer, MO- KOJIOKO.** , a bell , KO- JlOmOKTi. JlOKO^L'UIKTj. Those which end in urb, change t into CKT>; ex. 6apbiim>, profit , 6apbiineKi. 78. Substantives ending in a, preceded by the gutturals e, K and x, change * into eKi> and the gutturals into the palatals IK , z t w ; ex. ( 68 ) jyr-b, a meadow, ^y/Kein>. ntmyxi, , a cock, nfc- cyKi>, a branch, cyqeio,. myiuein,. 74- Substantives ending in , preceded by 4, or 3, changes into eirb; ex. saso^ a manu- factory aanoAeirb; ap6y3i> , a water - melon , ap6y3eip>, and ap6y3HKT>. Ex c e p t io n s. roi> , a year, ro^mcii. ca^, a garden, ca/uiicb. ropo/rb , a city, ropo- rjia3i> , an eye, rjia- 4OKTJ. SOKTj. 7^. Mas. Sub. ending in 6 and w change these terminations into eKi> ex. yrojib, coal, yro^eKij. pyqea^a rivulet, pyqeeKfc. E x c e p t i o n s. rB03/M>, a nail, TBOS- HOKOU, a room, no- , a dove , roay- capaii , a shed , capa- GOKI>. K0pa6^ib , a ship , KO- Feminine Diminutives. 76. Fern. Sub. ending in a preceded by a consonant, or in b change a, and b into KCI ex. pwGa, fish, pbiGica. ^oiua^b, ahorse, JIG- ma/iKa. HH. When a or b is preceded by two con- sonants , the diminutives take o or e between these consonants* ex. Hivia , a needle, nrojiKa; BepBb , a line, sepeBKa. Exceptions: cecmpa , sister, cecmpiiqa itiamb , mother, aiainyuiKa BtonBb , a branch , stiriKa. 78. When the final letter a is preceded by one of the gutturals 2, K, or x t a is chan- ged into ffa, and the gutturals into palatals; ex. KHiira , a book, KiikjKKa, ptna, a river, pi ( iKa; npoxa , a crumb, .KpoiiiKa. In the same manner the dental // is changed into z ex. nniima, a bird, nrnii'iKaj except, mernKa, aunt, meinyniKa. 79. Those ending in ma , UJCL and iyb , change a and b into wz/a ex. Kowa , a skin, Ko>KHi;a' poii^a, a grove, poii;iii;a; Beu^b, a thing, Beiqiii^a. except , poroata , a mat, poromKa. So. Those ending in n add KCL to the gen. pi.* ex. rijp;r , a weight gen. pi. rupi* , dimi- nutive Hipi>Ka j ALIHH, a melon, 4,binbKa. Neuter Diminutives. Si. Neuter substantives ending in o, pre- ceded by the consonants e, 4, , c and m , chpnge o f into 140 or z/6? , ex. ^epeiJo , a tree, ^.epeBt^Oj- ctao, hay, cbnuo; Ko.ieco, a wheel KO- jiecu,6. When o is preceded by two consonants o or e is taken between them, ex. ryaiHo, a barn, ry- ( 7" ) Memje ; cyKHo, cloth, cyixoinje. except, sepeo, a grain, aepHwiiiKo; Gpeuno , a log, GpeueuiKO, arfccmo , a place, wtcmeHKo. 82. Those ending in JIQ , preceded by a vowel, change o into &//; ex. Heajio , a sting, JKajibi^e ; o$bhjio , a bed - cover , OAb/uifai;e. 83. Those ending in be , lake the addition of ye or z/o ex. Koni>e , a lance , Konbeijo ; njiarnbe , a garment, n^ainbei^e. 84- Those ending in o , preceded by one of the gutturals 2,- if, or x , change o into KO and the gutturals into palatals , ex. JIWKO, rind, JIBFIKO; yxo , an ear, yiiiKO, 14 is also changed into z, ex. jimje, an egg, HHIKO; cep^ije, the heart, cep4,eqKO. CHAP. II. ADJECTIVES. SECT I. GENERAL REMARKS. 85. An adjective is a word, added to the substantive to express its quality; as, npHJi*5KHwii qe.ioBfcirb , an industrious man; ^oGpoA^niejiL- naa JKCHujMHa , a virtuous woman. Russian ad- ( 7' ) jectives admit, besides the degrees of signifi- cation , all the variations of the substantive : number, gender and case. 86. There are three kinds of adjectives in the Russian language ; qualifieative , possessive, and apocopated. The qualificative correspond to the adjectives of other languages , the pos- sessive and apocopated are peculiar to the Russian. 87. Possessive adjectives express a posses- sory quality , and may be rendered in English by a substantive in the genitive or possessive case; as, l^apcKiii ABOpeirb , the Tsar's palace; Hap6/j,Hoe npauo , the people's right. Or by a substantive used adjectively; as, ivie,4Bl5/Kba KO- ata, a bear- skin; pwGbfl qeiiiya , fish - scales. 88. Adjectives are apocopated (ycfcqeHHbinJ when the last letter or syllable is omitted , and are only used when the adjective is separated from its substantive by the auxiliary verb Gbimb , to be , which is not expressed, but understood to intervene; as ciacmie HenocmohnHo , fortune is fickle ; yjenie nojieauo , learning is useful. 89. Qualificative adjectives have three de- grees of signification , which are called the positive , the comparative , and the superlative. 90. The positive expresses simply the quality of an object, without increase or di- ( 72 ) . minution; as, npiu'ir/KHbijr , industrious,- 40- 6po/vi>meji iiti MM , virtuous. 91. The comparative degree increases or lessens the positive signification; as, npn:vii;K- Hte , more industrious; Ao6poA*me^bHte, more virtuous , and is the only degree, that is not subject to the modifications of number, gender, and case.' 92. The superlative expresses the quality in the highest or lowest degree ; as , irbihiiiii , the most industrious, Htnmiii, the most virtuous. 98. Adjectives of the positive and super- lative degrees must agree with their substan- tives in number , gender and case. 94. Adjectives of the mas. gen. terminate in the nom. sing, in bin or fit, which termi- nations are changed into an, or SIR for the fern, and oe or ee for the neuter. SECT II. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Declension of adjectives ending in bin. Mas. Fern. Neu. Nom. MyApbiH , wise. My^paa Gen. wj-^paro, of Dat. wy^poMy, to ( 73 ) Ace. My4pwH, aro, My Ins. My4pbMii> , by. My4poio, Prep, o MyvjpoMt, of. o My4poii Plural. Nom. MV, Gen. My Dat. MV v ACC. M Ins. Prep, o My 4 pbixTj , o wy^pbix-b, o My4pwxT. g5. According to the above example are declined all adjectives , ordinal numbers and the participles of passive verbs ending in bin, as well as adjectives used substantively , and family names, ending in on. When the last consonant of the adjective is a guttural, bi is changed into i- as , Be.iinnH, great; cmporiii, severe ; Bemxiii ancient. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES ENDING IN in, PRECE- DED BY ONE OF THE GUTTURALS Z , K OR X. Singular. Mas. Nom. Be-AHKin, great. Gen. BejiHKaro, Dat. Fern. Neut. BejlHKOH Be^iHKoii Siii, ACC. B6JIHRC Jaro, Ins. Prep.o BCJIHKOK), o BCJlHKOe. BeJlHKIIMTj. O 4 C 74 ) Plural. Nom. BejiHKie, Behind*!, Belinda Gen. BCJlHKHXTj , Be.AHKHXT> , Dat. BeJlHKHMfc, BCJlMKHWh, ACC. BCJIJ1K < ' BCJIHK < ' { lfXT> , JilXb, Ins. BeaHKHMH, BCJIHKMMM, BejIHKHMM. Prep. O BCJlHKMXTi, OB6JIHKMX1>, O BejlHKIIXT>. 96. According to this example are decli- ned all adjectives, ending in zin , Kin and xiit'^ all family names, ending in chin and IIKIH , and names of places ending in oe. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES ENDING IN m, PRECEDED BY JK , , tf/ , OR Z//. npiiro/Kifi , handsome. Singular. Mas. Fern. Neut. Kom. npnr6}Ki&, npurojKaa , npurotfcee. Gen. npurojKaro , npuroHteii (W) npuro/Karo. Dat. npnrojKeMy, npnrojKeH, Ace. npnr6a(< npiiroHcyro 9 Ins. npnro/KHMT>, npuroaceio nj Prep, o nparoiKeMij, o npHroncen, o Norn. irpwroHde , Gen. npurojKHXTj, Dat. npiiroiKiiMi), ? 1 ' Ace. npiiro/K C 7* 3 Plural. npiiroHfifl , npHro/Kiixi) , npnro>KMivnj, npuroii :? JlIXTj npuro/KHMTi. Ins. iipHrojKMMii, npwroyKHMH, npnro/KHMii. Prep, o npiirojKHXii, o npnr6}KnxTj, o npnr6aaixi>. $ gj. According to the above example are declined all qualitative adjectives, ending in jKiii , ziil , z/m and lyiii the participles of active and neuter verbs , of the past and present tense , ending in win and 114111 ; the superlative of adjectives, ending in zwm , and adjectives used substantively , ending in tin , n/jw , and min. 98. In familiar language the terminations but and m are frequently changed into 'on ; as cjitnofi , blind, instead of c dear, instead of ^oporiii 6<:c. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES ENDING IN HIM, AND Singular. Norn. ApeBHiS, Ancient. Gen. Dat. ApeBHeaiy, Ace. Ins. Prep, ApeBHFoio, o^peBHea, C 76 J Plural. Norn. Gen. Dat. ApeB II 11 M1> A I 1C > ACC. 4pCBH( I HX'b , Ins. Ape^HHMH , Prep. O ^peBHHXTj , O ApCBHHXfc, Q Ape BUM Kb, 99. All adjectives ending in the nomina- tive in nin and Hen are declined according to the above example. T H E M E X. ONTHE DECLENSION OF ADJE CTIVES. There is nothing perfect in the world. He who seeks friends , should first make himself worthy of friendship. A grateful man is like a in , BTJ , gov. the prep. should , the world , CBtmb. first, upe/K^e Bcero. there is nothing, Htmi* make himself, CA'Bjiariib- Himero. ca, gov. the ins. perfect, coeepujeHiiun. worthy, he who, Kino. friendship, seeks , kiqenrb ce6i. grateful , friend, Apyrb. is like, f 77 ) fruitful stifi, which liberally rewards the labour of the cultivator. There is no true happiness without virtue. A good intention cannot jus- tify an imprudent action. Modest and cheer- ful behaviour captivates the heart of man A man of a benevolent heart encfeavours to turn every thing into good , but a vicious man finds evil in good itself. In human life behaviour, captivates , fruitful, soil , noqua. liberally , me^po. which rewards, BO3- the labour, the cultivator, there is no , trfcnrb. true , iicmiLHHbiii. happiness , GjiaroAeH- crasie. good , 4,66pbin. intention , iiaiviiipeHie. cannot, ne justify, imprudent, enrb, heart , cepAije. of man , JHOAGH. of, eb , gov. the ins. benevolent, 4o6j)bin. endeavours, cmapaemr- CH. every thing , BCC. to turn , oGpamamb. into good , Bij 4o6p6. vicious 9 3.1011. but , JKC. finds , HaxoAnmTj. in good itself, ir acton , modest, cKpoM Hbiii. cheerful , eece.um. evil , sjio. in, BT>, gov. the prep. life , human , there is no permanent happiness. Happiness should be sought not in a noisy round of pleasures , but in the peaceful circle of a virtuous family. The ancient poets speak of the golden , the silver , and the iron age. Ancient Rome produced many great men. The Christian religion teaches us to be benevolent and humane. The rein-deer lives only in cold , and there is no , Htrrrb. permanent, npotHbin. happiness , cqacraie. should be sought , AOJI- JKHO HCKarat. not, ne. noisy , wy-MHbiii. round , Kpyn>. pleasure,yAOBOjii>cniBie. peaceful , Mupnbin, circle , Kpyrb. family , ceMeficraBO. ancient, Apeen in. poet, cmnxomBopeiTb. speak , roBopanrb. of, o, gov. the prep. golden , 3OJionibin. silver , cepe6pnHHbiii. iron , age, Rome , PHMTJ. produced, n many great, man , MyjKT> , V. 1 8. Christian , xpncmidn religion , Btpa. teaches , npiyqaenrb. us , nacTj. to be,6birrrt,gov. the ins. benevolent , 6jiazoAi>- mejibHbin. humane , zeAoetKOJiJO- 6u6bin. the rein - deer , ojienb, to be in the plu. live , BO cold , x and , a. ( 79 ) the camel in hot countries. Among the Chinese beauty consists in a broad face , narrow eyes , a flat nose , diminutive feet and a corpulent body. camel , uepG.iio/vb. face , hot , meiiAiin. narrow , country , cmpana. eye , among, y, gov. the gen. flat, Chinese , Kfirnaeirb. nose , HOCTJ. beauty, Kpacoma. diminutive , consists, cocmoHiirb. feet (dim.in.) HOJKKH. in, r>i>, gov. the prep, corpulent, broad , lunpoKiii. body , SECT. III. DEGREES OF s IGNIFICATIOIT. THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 100. The comparative degree is formed from the positive by changing the final let- ters bill and iA into te , as. weak. cjiaGte , weaker. wise. My^pte , wiser. , fresh. CBtHcte , fresher. 101. When the above terminations are pre- ceded by z, K or x, these gutturals are chan- ( 8 ) ged into their corresponding palatals, and e addd instead of te , as, strong. Kpmqe, stronger. A'oporia, dear. Aopowe , dearer. cyxiS, dry. cyme , dryer. 1 02. In the same manner A is changed into m into z and cm into 114 , as , bad. xy/Ke , worse. young. MOJIO/KC , younger. , thick, m6jiu}e, thicker. 6orarnhiia , rich. Gora^ie , richer. io3. The following are however exceptions to these rules : long. ^o.ite , longer. iiinpe , wider. ^.ajite , more distant. ropqte , bitterer. Bbiiue , higher. rjiyG^e , deeper. rajKe , more horrid. miiHxe , more liquid. pt/Ke , more rare. GJIMSKC , nearer. yace , narrower. cjiaine , sweeter. $ 104. The four following form the compa- rative irregularly : , wide. distant. bitter. BWCOKI'H , high. , deep. horrid. liquid. rare. , near. narrow. sweet. C 8' ) great. 66,ibme , greater. , little. MCHbiue , less, xopouiin , fine. jiyqiiie , finer. KpacHbiii, fair. Kpauie, fairer. io5. The connexion between the two ob- jects compared is sometimes expressed, as in. English, by the particle than , HejKejiH ; but when the comparison is vague and indefinite, the particle is omitted, and the latter sub- stantive put in the genitive case, as, Becna npiflinHte 3imi>i , spring is more agreeable thaa winter. 106. The comparison may be modified by ad- ding the preposition no , or the adverb zopds^o ; the former diminishing , and the latter aug- menting it, as, noayime, a little better; ro- paaAO jiy^iiie , much better. 107. When the auxiliary verb to be, of the third person, either singular 01 plural, occurs in English between the substantive and the ad- jective , it is to be omitted in the Russian trans- lation , as, 3Aopoiiie ^opovKe Goramcuiua , health is moie precious than riches. This rule relates also to adjectives in the positive degree V. 88. 108. Adjectives of the comparative degree are the same for ail genders. ( 82 ) THEME XL ON THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. The rose is more beautiful than the lily. The eagle is stronger than the hawk. The more simple food is, the more healthy it is. Spring is more agreeable than winter. Gold is more precious than the other metals, but iron is more useful than gold. The works of nature are much more majestic , than all the productions the rose , posa. beautiful, npeupdcHbiii. the lily , jihjiin. the eagle , opejrb. strong , cujibHbin. the hawk , Acmpefrb. the more food is , 'rfcMTj niiii;a GhiBaenrb , fol- lowed by the com p. simple, npocnibiii , V. 182. the more it is , nrbMi> oHa. healthy, winter, SHMR. gold , sojiomo precious than other metals , sprng, agreeable, npi/injHbin. but , HO. iron , /Kejji33o. useful , work , nature , much , V. 1 06. majestic, Hblft. all , Bet. production , npoiiSBe- ( 83 ) of art. A mountainous country is mucli more attractive than a dreary plain. The wool of the Saxon sheep is Jitter than the wool of the English. London is more populous than Paris. Asia is 77207%:? extensive than Europe ; but the Europeans are more civilized than the Asiaticks. The French language is easier than the Russian; hut the Russian is richer than the French. Venus is nearer to the sun than the earth , and Mercury is nearer than Venus. art , HCKycniBO. mountainous , ropnc- mwif. country, cmpaHa attractive , npnejieKci- dreary, plain , paBHima. the wool , uiepcrnb. Saxon , CaKcoHCKin. sheep , (sing.) oeua/ fine , moHKm, V. 101 English , London , populous Paris Asia , Asia. extensive , npocmpaH- HblH. Europe , Eepona. aEuropean,EBponeeirb. civilized, oGpasoeanHbiii an Asiatick, Asiameirb. French , language easy Russian , rich, HblH. i^ V. 102. Venus , Benepa. near, 6j,u3Kin V. io3 the sun , cojtmje. the earth , aeM^A. Meicury, MepKypiir. * C 84 ) THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 5 109. The superlative degree is formed from the comparative termination te , by chang- ing the final e into nwiii , ex. CBtmjrfce , lighter, CBtnuiiiiiiijiir , the lightest. 110. In those adjectives, in which the gutturals are changed into palatals, (V. ioi._) the e of the comparative is changed into a in the superlative degree , ex. GJIHJKC , nearer ; 6jiM>Kainiiiii , the nearest. 5 in. The superlative may also be formed as in English, by prefixing the adverb cd- Mbm , the most , to the positive degree , as : caivibiH nojiesHWH, the most useful. 112. When the quality of an object is to be expressed in a high degree , without com- parison with, or reference to any other object, the adverb eecbMa , or ozenb is prefixed to the po- sitive degree , as , BecbMa GoramwH , very rich. oqeHb mpy4HbiM , very difficult, $ n3. To increase the energy of expres- sion caMbiH , npe , ece or nan is sometimes prefixed to the superlative. caMaa nojieaHtiuuaa, the most useful of books, the brightest oi all. C 83 ) , the most gracious of all. , the most beautiful of all. n 4. The superlative may also be formed by prefixing the indefinite pronoun cce^6 to adjectives in the comparative degree , as : Bcero Apeuflie , the most ancient of all. THE M E XII. ON THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. Russia is the most extensive Empire in the world. Venus is the brightest of the planets. Self-love is the most dangerous flatterer. Natural history is one of the most agreeable sciences. Mercury is the smallest planet and the nearest Russia , Poccia. flatterer , extensive , npocmpdn- natural , ecmecuiBeH- HblH. HMH. empire, rocyAapcniBO, history, ncmopia. world , cetmii. one , o^Ha. Venus, BeHepa. agreeable, npinmnbin. bright, c&brruibiM,. science , Hayna. of ? M 3T- Mercury, MepKypin. a planet, miaHema. small,^rUe6A-m,V.i i3. self-love, caMOJiioGie. near, dangerous, onacubin. plaaet, ( 86 ) to the sun. The summits of the loftiest moun- tains are Lid in the clouds. The horse is the most beautiful, and the bheep the most useful of all domest.e an.mals. The ostrich is the largest of birds. The elephant is the most sagacious of all quadrupeds. ,Jt is consider- ed as the highest degree of rudeness to in- terrupt the discourse of another person. A good example is the strongest incitement io summt lofty, mountain , ropa. are hid , CKpbiBatornca. cloud , oGjiaKO. the horse , Ji6iua4,b. beautiful , Kpaciiebin. and the sheep, oBi;a JKC. useful , Of all , H3T> domestic, animal, JKHBOimioe. the ostrich , cinpoyci>. large , eejiuKin. hird , nmki;a. the elephant, CJIOHTJ. sagacious , quadruped , iemBepo- Horin. high , ebicoKiii. degree , craeneiflb. rudeness, HeyqmiiBocmb it" is considered, no- to interrupt , npepw- Barnb. of another pei^son, qy- HblU. the discourse , good , xopoifjiTi. example , strong , incitement , noGyf4,e- nie. to , Kb* -virtue. China is the most populous country in the world. China, KiimaH. country, cmpana, . world, SECT. IV. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 1 1 5. Possessive adjectives are of two kinds : personal and common. Personal possessive adjec- tives are formed from names, professions &c by, changing the s-nas. terminations into oei and eeT> , And the feminine into nw> and ifbin^- ex. , from MOHaxi> , a monk, IfapeBii , or from (apii a King ; CBCKpOBUHij, from , mother-in-law, 6x:c. 1 1 6. Common possessive adjectives are form- ed from substantives ,- and terminate in the norn. mas. in bin , cxiA , mil , and in. Those ending in bin are declined according to the first example of qualiflcative adjectives, My&- pbiii , the rest according to the second oi the following examples, pbi6in. ( 88 ) DECLENSION OF PERSONAL POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. , a priest's. Plu. of all gend. noiioBbi. Mas. N. nonoBi , G. nonoBa , D. nonoBy , S i it g. Fern. Neut. noiioBa, nonoBo, noil 6 BOH , nonoBa , nonoBon, noiioBy , noHOBLIMTj. A. nonor^ nonoBy, nonoso , nonon< I. nonoBbiM'h, nonoBOK), nonopbi!>n>, nononbiiviif. P. o nonoBOMi>, o nonoBoii, o nonoBOMt, o noBOBbix-b. DECLENSION OF COMMON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. pbi6in , fish (adj.) Sing. P I u r. Mat. Fern. Neut. of all gen. Nom. phiGiii, pbiGba , pbiGbe, pbiGbM. Gen. pwGbaro, pbiGten^ pwCbHro, pbi6bnx-b. Dat. pbiGbeMy, pbi6ben, pbi6beiviy ; pbibHMi>. Dbl6bK) . DblGbC , r DblGl.f { "baro * ' A '- I nx-b. InS. pblGbHMTj, pblGbCK) , pbl6bHMT> , pblGbHMU. Pr. O pblGbCMTs, O pblGbCH, O pblGbCMTj, O pblGbMXTj. The following examples will shew the man- ner of forming possessive adjectives from sub- stantives. Substantives. Poss. adjectives. ,Ely. a monk, father. C 89 . ) - Substantives. Pass, adjectives. nempb, Peter. n.^' CBeKp6Bi>,mother-in-law. , a camel, a wolf. Kosa , a goat. Onua , a sheep. IImiiu;a , a bird. /JepeBHH , a village. Salipb, an animal. 3 HAUL , winter.' SHMHJH. THEME XIII. ON THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. Cows , sheep s and goafs milk furnishes very healthy food. Goafs hair is employed in the manufacture of various stuffs. The Laplanders milk, MOJIOKO. is employed, ynompeo'- cow , Kopoea. jiflForrrb. sheep , oeijd. in the manufacture of, goat , Kosd. na. furnishes,AoemaBJiAenTb. various , very , Becbivia. stuff, healthy , SAopoBbiii. a Laplander, food , ( 90 ) live upon rein - deer milk, and make them- selves tents and clothing of the rein - deer skin. Hats , shawls and other articles are made of camel hair. Ox and calf skins are tanned for various uses. The inhabitants of the north clothe themselves in the winter in sable, fox, bear, and wolfskins. Beaver &u& ermine skins are high- live upon, iramaForn CH. a rein - deer , ojieni. milk, MOJIOKO. they make themselves , tent, inajiauib. clothing, of, H3i> , gov. the gen skin , KOHfa. a camel , hair , mepcmb. a hat , ui a shawl , other , A article , H 3 A* .lie, an ox, 60M). a calf skin are tanned, Baioim>. for various , AJIH paa- naro. use , ynornpeG^enie. inhabitant, the north , clothe themselves , , KO/Ka. in the winter , a sable , a fox, a bear , a wolf, a beaver , an ermine , zopno- cmdii. are highly valued, 4,6- poro c 9 i y ly valued. Hare and beaver down is employed in the manufacture of hats. a hare , 3a/i^. in , &JIB , gov. the gen, the down , nyx-b. manufacture , is employed, cjiyauinTb. a hat , SECT. V. APOCOPATED ADJECTIVES. 117. Adjectives may either be immediate* ly prefixed to the substantive, as: MO^O- Aoti qejioBtKij, a young man; cqacmjiHBaa JKC- Ha , a happy wife, or connected by means of the auxiliary verb Gbimb , to be. In the latter case, the verb is omitted in the present tense , and the adjective apocopated, ex. OHT> MOJIOAT>, he is young; ona cqacm^Mua , she is happy; OHH SAopoBbi t they are healthy. 1 1 8. Adjectives can only be apocopated in the positive degree V. 88. 119. Apocopated adjectives are formed from complete adjectives in the following manner. C 9* ) Comp. adjec. apocopated adjec. Plu. Mas. Fern. N cut. of all gen. iii; good. AoGp-b, pa, po, 466 pu. , litlle. Majii), jia , Jio , great. BCJIMRTJ , Ka , KO , xopomiM, fine, xopoujt , ma, 1116, xopomk. IRREGULARLTIES IN TH E FORMATION OF THE APOCOPE. , long. AO.^on> , Jira , Jiro , , short. KOpornoKb, mna, IDKO, SJlblH , evil 3O.Ab, 3Jia , 3JIO , , heavy. inii/KeKT), HCKa , JKKO , , strong. CH^CHTJ, jibHa, jbHo, ii, tranquil, cnouoenb, iina, OIIHO, 120. The plural of apocopated adjectives is formed by changing the final a of the fem into bi or n , ex. 4,o^rif. mnjKKa , mflJKKii. ? KOpOIUKII. CHJIbHa, CPUbHbl. SJlbl. CnOKOHHa. THEME XIV. ON APOCOPATED ADJECTIVES. God is merciful. Virtue is modest. Be obedient merciful, Mn.iocep^bin t be, 6y^,b. modest, cKpoMHbin. obedient, noKopnim. ( 93 ) in childhood , and thou wilt be respected in age. The road to fame is difficult. The society of the licentious is contagious. Even our ene- mies are sometimes useful to us by pointing out our defects. The tumultuous pleasures of the world are deceitful. Indolence is disgraceful and injurious. Man is mortal. The fox is cunning , the lion magnanimous , and the tiger ferocious. childhood , thou wilt be , Gyjeiiib. respected, notmeHHbin* age , cmdpocmb. the road , nymb. difficult, mpyAHbiii. the society, co66iu,e- cniBo. licentious , pacnymnbiM. people , JK>AH. contagious , 3apa3u- sometimes , even , caivibie. enemy , Bparb, V, are , 6biBaK)nrb. to us , Haiviij. useful , no.iesHbiu* by pointing out, onr our , defect, V. i/f. the tumultuous , LUV>I- HblH. pleasure , dece i tf til , indolence, jrfcuocmb. disgraceful, nocrnbiA- Hblli. injurious, epe^ n bin. mortal , cMeprnnbiii. the fox , jiHcifqa. cunning, xumpbiii. the lion , JIGBTJ. magnanimous , ec.in- KO4J UJtiblH . the tiger , mnrpij. ferocious , ( 94 ) Love is blind. Time is precious , and life short. love , jito6oRb. precious, blind , cMniiti. life , ;i;ii:iiib. time , speMfl. short , Kopommn. S E C T. VI. AUGMENTATIVE AND DIMINUTIVE AD JE CTIVES. 121. Augmentative adjectives are only em- ployed in the apocopated form, in the posi- tive degree and nominative case. 122. The augmentative terminations of ad- jectives are, exonen-b and eiueneK^ , either of which may be used. Mas. Fern. Neut. , white, Cfe./iexoHeK'b, HbKa, iibKo. green, aejeneujeHeirb, HbKa, HbKO. 128. Diminutive adjectives are of two kinds: the first terminate in onhKin and etibKin , and relate to the diminutiveness of the object ; as GiueHbKoii njiamo'iHKii , a little white hand- kerchief; the second end in eeambin and oea- and may be rendered in English by an adjective with the mod ificative particle, rather ; HeOo irjoBarno , the sky is rather red; OHI> cjia- he is rather weak. Formation of diminutive adjectives. Mas. Fern. Neut. OH , bad. njioxoubKiii , Kaa , HOC. , weak. caaGeHbKiii, Kaa, Roe. , red. ajioBarnwH , maa , moe. 124. The apocopated terminations of these adjectives are OUCKI or eneKT> , a, o, pi. n\ oeanrb or eeanrb , a , o , pi. n. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON THE DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. The gentle and refreshing evening had succeed- ed (already in place of) the sultry day, when young Uslad, the minstrel, approached the banks gentle , muxiii. refreshing, npox.id.4- when, Hbin,. Uslad , the evening , seqepij. young , had succeeded, aacray- minstrel, najiij. approached , npn6jiH- already, yace. place , Mtcmo. bank , Gepen,. sultry, na*. he had past , flowery , his , CBoeii. youth , lOHocmb. smooth , e^d^Kifi. surface, noBepxHocmb. water, BO4,a , (to be put in the> plu.) scarcely , ruffled , j gentle , zephyr , was covered , noKpfaima radient, po glory , cifluie. the west , mirror, s was reflected, ompa5Ka- JlHCb. from one side , CTJ OA- HOII dark , forest , castle, terrible , Rogdai , surrounded, OKpy/Ken- HOH. high , ebicoKul. oaken , Ay6o6biii. palisade , nibim*. it was built, OHT> 6bvn* nocmpoenij. steep , hill, ropa. f 97 ) there , where now we see the embattled walls of the Crerael , the magnificent halls of the an- cient Russian Tsars J from the other the green bank, covered with shrubs and scattered with the lowly cottages of the peasantry. All around, reigned tranquillity ; the air was impreg- nated with the fragrance of the blooming lin- den-tree ; at times the voice of the nightingale, there , maivrb. where , r^t, now , Hbint. we see , BHAHMTJ. embattled , syfadmon. a wall , crrrEHa. Cremel , Kpe&ob. magnificent , BCJIHKO- hall 7 uepmori). anrifnt . sin&R H.I'M.. ancient , ^peenn, Russian, PycKiii. Tsar ab. Tsar, apb. from the other, CT> green , Lank , Cepert. covered , noKptimun. shrubs , scattered , -ocb'inaHHbiii. lowly , HU3KIH. cottage, all around , reigned, u,apcmBOBajio. tranquillity , CHOKOH- cmfiie. the air, B63,ayxT>. was impregnated, 6bijii pacmBopee-b. fragrance , Gjiaroyxanie. blooming, the linden-tree, at times , the depth, forest, jitci resounded, the voice , rojiocb. nightingale, COJIOBCH. 5 C 9 ) or the plaintive notes of the thrush resounded in the depth of the forest; at others the fickle breeze shook the tops of the trees, and the timid rahbit , startled by the rustling, skipped into the thicket and rattled among the with- ered branches. Uslad proceeded along the path- way , which wound among the trees- his soul, swelling with recollections of the past , was plaintive, nezcuibnuii. notes , irbnie. the thrush , HBo^ra. at others , HHor4,a* fickle , HenocmoHHHbin, the breeze, BtmepoK*. shook, nonipacajit. the top , BepuiHHa. a tree , 4,epeBo. timid , poOKiii. a rabbit , Kpojinicb. startled, ncnyzaHHbiii. the rustling , mopox-b. skipped , GpocajicH. the thicket, Kycmap- HHKT>. rattled , (among , expessed by the Ins, case} withered , nscoxwiii. * branch , proceeded , along , no, gov. the dat. the path way , mpo- niuiica. which wound, H3BiiuaB- among a tree , swelling, recollection of the past, BociioMiniaiiie. was , 6bi4a. , gov. the ins. * The participles are declined as adjectives. r 99 ) plunged in pensiveness. Where art thou O happiness! exclaimed Uslad, 1 return to the spot , on which I once exulred in my existence: the shady grove , the bright river, the green banks are still the same , the fragrant lin- den - tree still sends forth its grateful odour , and the plaintive notes of the nightingale and thrush are still heard in the depth of the plunged, pensiveness Bocrab. where art thou, r#b HIM. O happiness, Mofl pa- bright, river , i green , are still the same , He exclaimed , BOCKJIHK- I return , npwxoncy. to, Ha. the same , moHfe. spot , Mtcmo. on which , Ha KOTITO- POMT>. once , irfcKor4a. exulted , Bocxnin,aacH. in my existence , 6bi- mieMT> CBOHMt. shady , mtHucmun. a grove , pouja. still , no fragrant, 6jiazoGOHHbin. the linden - tree, jiiina. sends forth , pas^H- Baemij. grateful , 0.104 ocmnbiii. odour , aanavb. still , no npe/KHCMy. plaintive , yn'bi.ibm. notes , ntnie. the nightingale , co- JIOBCH. the thrush , HBOJira. are heard, paa^aeraca. depth, rviyf>"Ha. forest; but he , who once delighted in the fragrance of the blooming linden - tree and the warbling of the nightingale , is now dead to Joy- Joukofsky. hut he , a momb. fragrance , GjiarosoHie. who, Kino. blooming, itetmymiii. once, HtKorAa. warbling, ni>nie. delighted, ycjia/K/i,ajicH. is now dead to joy, fin, expressed by the momi>y>Ke HC nox6/KT> Ins. case.) na caiuaro ceGfl. TABLE FOR THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. S i n g u I a r. M a s. F e in. N e U t. Nom. Bin 111 aa aa oe ee Gen. aro ;iro oii/i ia)eH/iaj aro HFO Dat. OMy eiviy OH w en OMV ewy Ace. iblH aro 1H aro yio OK, oe ee Ins. BIMB HMB OK) ero BIMB HMB Prep. OMB CMB OH ew OMB CM1> P I u r u I. Nom. Bie ie Wfl ia Bia ia Gen. BIXB HXfc BIXB HXB BIXB HXB Dat. BIMB 11 MB BIMB HMB BIMB HMB r tie ie Bia 1H Ace. / Bia 1H 1 blXB HXB BIXB HXB Ins. WMH 11 MH B1MH imii BIMI1 IIMH Prep. BIXB HXB BIXB HXB B)XB HXB. CHAP. III. NUMERALS. $ 125. Numbers are of two kinds : cardinal and ordinal; the former are declined as sub- stantives , the latter have the termination and declension of adjectives. SECT I. CARDINAL NUMBERS, o,4HHT>, one. .fljBa , two. iupn , three, qemwpe , four, mimb , five, niecmb , six. ceMb , seven. BoceMb, eight. nine. ten. eleven. twelve. thirteen, ienibJpHaAu;anib, jiflmnaAuariib , 4,Ba4,i;amb OAHHT>, ABa,4,u,anifa 4,Ba , copoKT> inecmb4,ecflmi> BoceMb/aecanib t crno cmo rapiicma , qembipecraa , namb coim>, iiiecrab cornij , fourteen. fifteen. sixteen. seventeen. eighteen. nineteen. twenty. twenty - one. twenty - two &c. thirty. forty. fifty. sixty. seventy. eighty. ninety. a hundred. a hundred and one &c. two hundred. three hundred. four hundred. five hundred. six hundred &c. a thousand. two thousand. five thousand. a million. $ 126. The collective numbers are; ndpa t a. pair; na.rnoK'b , five ; no.i^kjjKnnbi , half a dozen ; AC- ckfnoKT> , ten ; jusKnHa , a dozen; 460, jecjimKa , a score ; COHIHR , a hundred. $ 127. The distributive numbers are: no- jioBkiia , half; mpenifa , a third; HemBepmb , a quarter ; iio^mopa , one .and a half; HOJI- inpernb/i , two and a half; nojiieiuBt pina , three and a half, &c. . 128. The proportional numbers are: Hoii , double; inpoHHofi , treble; quadruple; cmoKpamnwH , centuple. 129. The simple cardinal numbers are de- clined as the substantives , which have similar terminations; and the compound, as: namb- Aecarnb , fifty ; uiecmbAecHinb 9 sixty &c. being composed of two numbers , each number is declined according to its o\vn termination. Example. Simple. Compound. N. luecmb , six. niecmbAecflmb , sixty. G. iiiecrnii , of niecmiiAecaniH , of D. mecmk , to inecmHAecamH, to A. uiecmb. mecnibAecainb. I. uiecmbK), by or with. iuecnii>k> ^ecarabK) , by or with. P. o mecniH , of o inecmHAecamH , of. i3o. The following are declined as adjec- tives. C 104 ) Mas. Fern. Neut. Plu. N. oAHirb, one. OAHa , OAHO . OAHH. G. OAHOFO, of OAHOH, OAHOFO , D. OHOMy, tO OAHOH, OAHOMy, A. OA I. OAHHMT>,byorwith. OAHOK>, OAHHMI, P. 061 OAHOMTJ, of OAHOH, OAHOMT>, Mas. and. Neut. Fern. Nom. ABa , two, Gen. AByxi , of - Dat. ABVMI. , to H 3 J- Jyxi, Ace, yxt Ins. AB)'MH , by or with. Prep, o AByxt, of o Mas. and Neut. Fern* Nom. 66a , both. Gen. o6oHxi>, of Dat. oGoHivrb , to Ace. o6c ' , lOHXTj Ins. o66wMH, by or with, Prep, o o6oHXT> , of . Of all three genders. Nom. mpw, mpoe , three, qernbipe , four. Gen. mpexij, mpoHX-b qerawpexij, of Dat. nrpeM-b, mponMb. qembipeivrb , to (e. Ace. mp inpo/ qenibip/ ' - {&. Ins. iripe.via, mpoHMH. qembipi>Mfl, byorwith. Prep, o rnpexi), mpoHXi>. o qemupexi., of. 1 3 1. The numbers, mpiicma , three hun- dred and iiemhipecma , four hundred , are de- clined according to the first of the following examples, and uiectnhcoin'b , six hundred j cewhcomi), seven hundred; BoeeMLcoun,, eight hundred and AeB>imhcomi>, nine hundred, ac- cording to the second. N. ^Btcinw , two hundred, nnmb comij, five hun- d.ed. G. AByxi corn-b , of -- namk COITTT>, of- -- D. 4,By.\n> cmaMTj , to narnn cmiiMT> , to -- - A. 4B*cmH naffiL conn>. -- I. AByMfl crnaMH , by or JiflmLio cmaMH,byor with. I with. P. o AByxi) cmaxij , of o nnmh cmax'hjof. 1^2. Each simple number or component part of a compound number (however many there may be) is declined according to its own termination. Nom. nainb-conrb ntecaibAe&hn> ceivib. Gen. JiHmH - corai> iijecrnif^ecninH CCMH. Dat. nnink-crnaMTj uiecrnHACcainw ce\m. Ace. numb - corm> mecniAecamh ceMb. Ins. narnhFo-cmaMM wecmbWAecnini>to cewbio. Prep, o namn-cmax-b mecnifuecamM CCMH. THEME XV. ON THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. The universal deluge in the time of Noah , continued three hundred and seventy - seven days. The Israelites wandered forty years in the wil- derness. The solar year consists of three hun- dred and sixty - five days, five hours and forty- five minutes. Rome was built seven hundred and fifty - three years before the birth of Christ. Ptolemy Philadelphus employed seventy - two interpreters in the translation of the old tes- universal , BceoGojiii. deluge , nomoiTb. the time , B Noah , HOH, continued , ca. day , Aerib. wilderness , nycrnwHa. the solar year, cojineq- Hbiii ro^b. consists, cocmoiinib. of, H3i>, gov. the gen. hour , qact. minute, MWHyma. Rome , was built, nocmpoeHTj. before , /i,o , gov. the gen. the birth , poacAecmBo. of Christ , XpMcmoBo. Ptolomy Philadelphus, IIinojioMeii employed, interpreter , HJIKTa. in, AV*, gov. the gen. the translation, nepe- BO^b. old , Bemxift. tebtameut, I0 7 lament into the Greek language. Constantinople was taken by the Turks , one thousand one hundred and twenty- three years after the removal thither of the capital by Constant! ue the Great , and two thousand , two hundred and six years after the building of the city of Home. The Alexandrian library consisted of three hundred thousand vo- lumes. Moses left Egypt with six hundred thou- sand Israelites , four hundred and thirty years after their first establishment in that country. A circle is divided into three hundred and sixty into , Ha , gov. the ace. Greek , FpeqecKid. language , flSHK-b. Constantinople, KOH- Rome , PHMT,. Alexandrian, was taken , 6mai> B3iirm>. Turk , TypoKT>. after , noc.it. the removal, nepece^e- nie thither , my4,a. the capital , cmo^Hna. Constaiitine, KoHcman- great the building, nocmpo eue. library, 6ji6jii6ineKa. consisted, cocmonjia. of, H3i> , gov. the gen. volume , Moses, left , Egypt, Eriinemi>. their, nxi,. establishment, noce- aenie. that, cen. country , cmpana. a circle , Kpyrb. is divided,pa3^taAeincH, degrees. The light of the solar rays reaches us in ahout eight minutes. Alexander the great ascended (lie throne at twenty, and died at thirty years of age. Thirty thousand Jewish prisoners of war lahoured during five years at the erec- tion of the Roman amphitheatre, known under the name of the Coloseum. The poitico of this building was a thousand and fifty feet in circumference, and suppoited by 'Jour rows of degree the light, solar , ray , reaches , to, AO. Us , Haci>. about , noqrriH. Alexander, ascended , Bcmynk*b. the throne , npecrnojtb. of age , oim> po4y. at , npii, gov. the prep, the building, nocmpoe- uie. Roman , PHMCKIH. amphitheatre , a.\i(|>H- mearnpij. known, H3BiiciiiiiL,iii. under,no4b,gov.ihe inst. name , HM. Coloseum , Kojuseii. laboured , paGoinajir. duri ng, BI> npoAOji/KeH i e. Jewish prisoners of war, BOeHHOIUtHHblXb EB- the portico , of this , cero. building, 3Aanie. was , H a foot , circumference , OKpyjK was , 6bu*b. supported, noAAep>Kii a row , pillars, each two hundred and twenty -two feet high. It w;is capable of ronia'.uing A/z- rf/W thousand spectators, and not unf reKe. a dancer, amused , in this , stupendous, orpoMHbiw, Roman , PHMCKIH. public , nyG^Hha. MoMt-hlanc, IV is , Chimhorazzo ; pacco. ( no SECT. O R D I Jl AL W nepBbiH , BmopbiH, mpemiii, Hum bin , inecrnhiii OCbMblH iiepBbiif, Binopbiu, COpOKOBbin II. UMBERS, first. second. third. fourth. fifth. sixth. seventh. eighth. ninth. tenth. eleventh. twelfth. thirteenth. fourteenth. fifteenth. sixteenth. seventeenth. eighteenth. nineteenth. twentieth. twenty-first. twenty-second. &c. thirtieth. fortieth. fiftieth. sixtieth. combii cmo mpexcombiH , inecmcombiH BOCMHCOHIblW , Ill ) seventieth, eightieth, ninetieth, hundredth. hundred and first &C. two hundredth, three hundredth, four hundredth, five hundredth, six hundredth, seven hundredth, eight hundredth, nine hundredth, thousandth, two thousandth, five thousandth. MHjijiioHHbiH. millionth. $ i33. Ordinal numbers are declined as adjec- tives. EXAMPLE. Singular. Mas. Fern. Neut. Norn. nepBbiH, the first, nepsaa , nepBoe. Gen. nepBaro , of . nepaoH , nepBaro. nepBOMy. nepBoe. nepeuii , nepBVK), Dat. nepBOMy , to -- Ace. nepBbifi (aroj Inst. nepBi,j;vn,byorwith. iiepeoio, Prep, o nepBOML , of o nepBoi, C "i* ) Plural. Nom. nepBbie , nepBbjjj t Gen. riepBbixb, ncpnux-b ,. Dat. nepiii,i\n>, nepnuMb, ACT. nepBoie (bixbj, nepsbui Ins. nepBhiMM , nepnbiMM, Pi-ep. u uepRbJxi>, o nepBi,i\b, 1 34. In marking the chile from any par- ticular era , the Russians employ ordinal num- bers, ex. KHwrone'iainiuiie n^oGpiimeHo BI, rnbi- cjma leiiibipecMiia co[)OKOBO>ih ro/iy , printing was invented in the thousand four hundred and fortieth yrar. (in the year one thousand four hundred and forty.) i35. When the numher is compound , or composed of several simple numbers , the ordinal termination is only added to the last, ex. AwepHKa Gbijia onriKpbima BT> mbicnia qe- mbipecma ACBHHocmo emopoMi, ro^y, America was discovered in the thousand four hundred and ninety- second year (In the year one thou- sand four hundred and ninety - two.j THEME XVI. ON THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. On the monument of Peter the Great there is the following inscription : Catherine the second to Peter the first. The names of Peter the first , Fredrick the second and Henry the fourth are immortal in history. Rome had seven kings : the first was Romulus , the second Numa Pompilius , the thirdTullus Hostilius, \hefourth Ancus Martius , the fifth Tarquin Pi iscus , the sixth Servius Tullius , and the seventh and last, Tarquin the proud. The first month in monument, Peter , flempTj. there is, H3o6^ following , Cjii>,4yK)ii;iH, inscription , Ha^nncb. Catherine, EKamepkna, name , HMH. Fredrick, Henry, immortal , GeacMepin- history, Hcmopis. Rome , Puivrb. had , a King, was , Romulus , P6 Numa Pompilius, Hy- Ma noMiTHviin. Tullus Hostilius,Tyjijn, Ancus Martius , AHKT> Map I^M. Tarquin Priscus, Tap- KBHHill HpUCKlj. Servius Tullius, Cep- BJH Ty^ijiiii. Tarquin the proud, Tap- monlh , ai ( "4 ) the year is January, the second February, the third March , [he fourth April , the fifth May, the sixth June, the seventh July, the eighth August, the ninth September, the tenth Orto- ber, the eleventh November, the twelfth De- cember. The compass was invented in the year one thousand three hundred and three. The Russian company was established in England in the year one thousand five hundred and fifty' five. Peter the Great defeated Charles the twelfth at Poltava in the year one thousand se- ven hundred and nine. America was discover- ed in the fifteenth century. January, V. 4i- February, March , Mapnrb. April , Anpijib. May , Mait. June , IioHb. July , IK>JII>. August , ABrycnrb. September, October , November , December, the compass, KOMnaci>. was , invented, H3o6ptmeHT>. Russian , PocciiiciuH. company, moproBoe 66- was established , OCHO- BaHO. England , defeated , no6fc,4H.u> Charles , Kapjrb. at, npn, gov. the prep. Poltava , IIojira.TBa. was discovered , onr- Kpwrna. century , ( "5 ) PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON NUMERALS. Russia extends from East to West one hun- dred and sixty - nine degr< es and a half, that is, from the thirty - ninth to the two hundred and eighth degree of longitude *; but if we include the most distant isles of the eastern ocean (which reach to the two hundred and twenty -fifth degree), it extends one hundred and sixty - nine degrees. In its greatest breadth from North to South it extends thirty - eight Russia , Poccifl. extends, irpocmnpaeni- Cfl. from, onrb, gov. the gen. the east , Bocmoirb. the west , sana^T*. (here follows the pre- position na.) and , ci>, gov. the ins. a half , nojioBiiHa. a degree , rpa4yci>. that is , mo ecmb. distant, om4ajieHHbiH. isle, oempoB-h. eastern , Bocm6 l iHi>itt. ocean , OKeairb. which , KOH. reach , AoxoA/inrb. (it extends , not to be repeated.) its greatest breadth , caaioe Gojibiiioe npo- longitude , but if we include , a the north , CEBepi>. the south , lorb. it extends , cocraaBjia- enrb. * Reckoning from the meridian of the isle of Fero. degrees, that is from the seventy - eighth to the fortieth degree of Latitude ; consequently the greater part of Russia is situated in the tem- perate , and the smaller part in the frigid zone. The whole surface of the Empire (exclu- sive of the isles of the Eastern ocean) covers a space of three hundred and forty thousand Ger- man Geographical square miles , or sixteen mil- lio?is , six hundred and sixty thousand square versts. latitude , ninpoma. consequently , the greater part, BC.AII- is situated , 113x6411 mcji. temperate , vMtpeHUbiH. the smaller, caaiafl Ma- frigid , zone , the whole surface, BCH ace noBepxHocmfa. the Empire , cmBo. exclusive , BbiK^ioqa/i. covers a space of, npo- crnnpaemcH Ha. Geographical, Feorpa- cfjHHeCKiil. square , KBa4pamHbiii. German , HfcMeqKiif. mile , MUJIH. or , HJIH. a vrst , Bepcraa. "7 ) CHAP. IV. PRONOUNS. SECT. I. GENERAL REMARKS. i36. A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 187. Pronouns may be divided into per- sonal , relative , possessive , demonstrative and .indefinite. i38. Pronouns are subject to the same mo- difications of number, gender and case as sub- stantives. 189. Personal pronouns are used instead of names. There are three persons: the first, who speaks, the second, the person spoken to, and the third, the person spoken of. I, thou, he; H t mbi,oH,T>. plural: we, you, they; MM , 6bi , ami. i4o. Relative pronouns relate to some pre- ceding word: or phrase. i4i- Possessive pronouns denote posses- sion, as: MOU,, my; moon, thy; ezo 9 his. &c. 142. Demonstrative pronouns , serve to point out objects, as , ceil , this; morm> , that Sec. Indefinite pronouns are such as belong C "8 ) to neither of the above kinds, as, niKo- mopbin , a certain , n&Kmo some one &c. i43. Pronouns become interrogative by the construction of the sentence and the affix of the sign (?). SECT. II. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS, i st. Person. Sing. P I u. Norn, a , I. MM , we* Gen, uetth , of me. HHCT> , of us. Dat. Mirb , to me. naivn> , to us. Ace. RICH a , me. naci> , us. Ins. MHOK) , by me. HaMn, by us. Prep, o Mat, of me. o nacii , of us. 2 nJ. Person. Norn, mbi , thou. BW , you. Gen. rneGfl , of thee. Baci>, of you. Dat. meCt, to thee. Baivn> , to )ou. Ace. nie6 , thee. uac-b , you. Ins. njoi/OK) , b\ thee. BUMII , by you. Pi ep. o meoii , ot ihee. o Baci> , of you. C "9 ) 3rd. Person Singular. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. OHT, , he. ona , she. OHO , it. Gen. ero , of him. en, of her. ero, of it. Dat. euy, to him. eii , to her. e*iy , to it, Arc. ero, him. ee , her. ero, it. Ins. MM* , J>y him. CK> , by her. HMT> , by it. Prep, o HCM-b, of him. o Hen, of her. o HCMI*, of it. P I u. Mas. Fern. and. Neut. Nom. OHH , they. OH*. Gen. HXT> , of them. MX*. Dat. HM-b , to them. HMT>. Ace. HXI> ; them. HXT>. Ins. HMM , by them. HMH. Prep, o HMXT> , of them. ' o 5 1 44- The reflective personal pronoun self, is of all three genders, and of both num- bers: ca>n> ce6a , himself; ca>ia ce6a , herself, CUMU ce6a , itself , ca.\iw ceGa , themselves. $ i45. CaM-b is sometimes added to nouns and personal pronouns to mark with greater precision the identity of the person : ca.vm po- 4,kuiejin HC KpaciiBbi , HO A*mn HVb , the parents themselves are not handsome, but their children. M. N. G. D. 12O F. caua . N. C3MO Pill. CaMH. caMaro , ca>ioii , caMaro, caMiixi. , caivioH , caMOMy , ca>iMMT>. A. ce6a, caMaro , ca>iy , cawo , ca>inx:b. I. COGOK), caMHM1>, CaMOK), Ca>lHMT>, caMHMIl. P. o ce6l) ; o cauoM-b. o cawow, o caMOMt, o caamx-b. THEME XVII. ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Tell me with whom you * associate , and / will tell you * who you * are. Remember me, when you * are fortunate. He , who is not for me , is against me. Aristotle, giving tell , CKaHck. are fortunate , Gy^euib with whom , ci> KtMi>. cqacnuuiBij. associate , oGxo^iiiiiLca. he who , KITIO. will tell, CKaajy. is not, He. who you are, KITIO HIBI with, co, gov. the ins. maKOBT>. is against , np6niHBT>. remember , IIOMHII. Aristotle, Apucmomejib. when, Kor^a. giving, * In the above sentences, the second person plural of the English , when marked with an asterisk is to be rendered by the second person singular in Russ. alms to an unworthy man , said : I do not give this to him, but to humanity. A true friend disco- vers to us our faults. Natural history gives (toj us an idea of ourselves , and of the objects which surround us. Reason points out (to us) the road to happiness; but our passions divert us from, it. Upon a certain Egyptian statue there was the following inscription : I am he, who was, is^ which surround, alms, unworthy , s^oif. said , CKasajTb. I do not give, ne but, a. human it} cmBO. true , friend , disco vers,oinKpbiBaenrb. our , Hauin. fault, He^ocrnamoKij. natural , ecrnecniBeH- Hblil. history , ncmopifl. gives , Aaerirb. an idea , nonAmie. of, o, gov. the prep. ourselves, caMii,V. izfo object, reason points out, yKa3biBaeim. the road , nyoib. to, Ki>, gov. the dat. happiness, 6jiaronojiy- but, a. qie. divert , omB^eKatonTb. from it, orni> onaro. upon, Ha, gov. the prep. a certain, Egyptian, statue , cmarnya. there was, following , inscription , am he , ecMb nioinb. who was, KOTO is., ecinz). 6 \ / and will be for ever; no one has ever. taken the veil off me. To be angry is to punish one's self for the fault of another. Beware of a tool, if you* touch him of a wise man , if you * do (to) him an injury, and of a vicious man, if you* associate with him. Many people are like the current coin ; riot unfrequently we are obliged to receive them according to the rate of exchange, and not accord- ing to their intrinsick value. a vicious man , ajibiif. associate, cBCAeuib ana- KOMCmBO. will be , for ever , BT> no one , HHKrao. has ever , eii;e. taken , ne cHHMajrb. off, CT>, gov. the gen. veil, aafiica. to be angry, rHl>Bami>cfl. is, SHainnrb. to punish, HaKasbiBanib. for , sa. the fault of another, many , Miiorie. people , jiK>4,n. are like , no^66HM, gov. the dat. current, xo^fl^iH. coin , MOHema. not unfrequently, He we are , 6i>iBaeMT>. obliged, beware , GeperiiCL. a fool , rjiyneijij. if, ecjiw. touch , mpoHeuib. a wise man , do, an injury, to receive, according, no , gov. the dat. the rate, not expressed. the exchange , KypCT>. intrinsick, value , SECT III. RELATIVE PRONOUNS* $ i46\ The relative pronoun Komopbiii, which, is applied indiscriminately to persons, or things inanimate , and answers to the English personal and impersonal pronouns who and which. DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Komopbiii. 5 i n g. M. F. N. N. KomopwH, Komopaa , Komopoe. G. Komoparo , KomopoH , Komoparo. D. KOinopoMy , Komopon , KomopoMy. . JWH , A. Komop< Jaro, Komopyio , Komopoe. I. KOm6pbIMT> , Komopoio , . KomopbiMTi. P. o KomopoMi) , o Komopoii KOHIOpOMTj P I u. N. Komopwe , Komopwa', Komopbia. G. KomopwxT, , KomopwxTj , KomopbixTi, D. Korn6pbiMi> , ' f ble > A. Komopj ibJXT, , I. KomopbiMH , P. o Komopbixii, Komop , S p{ J wa , KomopbiJi. o Koinopbixij. KomopbiMH , o Komopbixij, 147. When the style approaches the sub- lime , the relative pronoun KOH , who , which , is employed instead of Komopbiii; but it is never used in common conversation. ( "4 ) DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Koii. M. F. Plu. Nom. KOH, KOH , KOC , KOII. Gen. Koero , KOCH, Koero , KOIIXt. Dat. KOCMy , KOCH , KOCMy , KOHMT,, Ace. Kof> KOK>, Koe, KO/ lero, (MXT> , Ins. KOHlVTb , KOCH) , KOII.M-b , KOII MM. Prep. O KOCMTj, O KOCH, O KOeMT>, O KOIIXT?. 1 48. The relative pronoun Kino, who, can only relate to persons , and is declined as follows. Nom. Kmo , who. Gen. Koro , of whom. Dat. Koiviy , to whom. Ace. Koro , whom. Ins. KtMfc , by or with whom. Prep, o KOMI , of whom. $ 1 49. The relative pronoun lino , what t is impersonal. Nom. qmo , what. Gen. iero , of what. Dat. qeaiy , to what. Ace. Hino , what. Ins. qtMt, by or with what. Prep, o qeMb , of what. M. F. N. PI*. Norn, left , whose. qfaa, qbe , Gen. qbero, of qben, qbero , Dat. qbeivty, to qbei, qbeiviy, Ace. q) eH ' (hero, Ins. qbUMt, by or with, qbero, Pr. o qbCMii, of THEME XVIII. ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Beware of him , who continually praises thee. He is brave , whom nothing can disturb. People seldom love him , whom they fear. beware , ocmeperaHca to disturb , BcmpeBO- of him, moro. * HCHmb. continually , Geanpe- can , He BT* cocmo- cmaHHO. praises, XBajinnrb. people, is brave , MyjKecm- seldom , BCHTJ. love , jiK>6flnrb. nothing, nnqm6. they fear, * In such phrases, the Russians make use of the demon- strative pronoun mom*, that qne, instead of the personal pronoun. Bo not consider it a disgrace to learn in age , what you neglected in youth. Defer not until to - morrow, what thou canst per- form to - day, Philip king of Macedon had an attendant, who used to remind him, that he was mortal. Life is like a dream , from which we are aroused in the hour of death. He is truly happy , who does not give way to his prudent , d^aropasyw- do not consider it , ne , no? urn aft. a disgrace , sa to learn , age , cmapocmb. neglected , He youth , defer not, ne had, an attendant , HLIII. used to remind , Hano- until , 40 , gov. the gen to morrow , saempe. thou canst, perform , to - day, Philip , King , E[apb. of Macedon, was mortal, CMepniHbiH. life , 5KH3Hb. is like, noAoGna, gov. the dat. a dream, COHI>, dat, cny. from, orm>, gov. the gen. we are aroused , npo* the hour , death , cwepmb. truly, happy , does not give way, ne Aaeim> BOJIH. tO his , CBOHMTi. passions. Reflect previously on what you * intend to say.- We are always fond of those who admire us , but not always of those , who?n we ourselves admire. He , who justifies him- self without being accused, only excites sus- picion. It is difficult to love him, whom we do not respect. True civilization is that, which teaches us to be useful to the society, in which we live. passion , cmpacmb. reflect , noAyMafr. previously , nanepeA'b. on, o, ,gov. the prep, intend to say , xoienub CKasamb. always , are fond , of those , admire us , HaMi> BJiHioraca. but not , a ne. ourselves , caivirf. we admire, yAHB^flCMCJi. justifies himself, onpa- accused , o6BHHfleMT. he , monTb. only , excites , suspicion , it is difficult, to love , we do not respect, He true , H civilization , npocBt- without being, He 6y- is that , ecrnb mo. teaches , yqmnTj. to be, GbiniB, gov. the ins. useful , iKuesHbiii. society, 66ii;eciuBo. live , JKHBCMlj. ( "8 ) SECT. IV. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. M. F. Nom. MOH, my. MOfl , Gen. Moero , MOCH , Dat. MoeMy , MOCH , C w Ace. MO? ' {ero, MOK> , InS. MOHMTj , MOCK) , Prep, o Moeivrb, O MOCH N. Plu.ofallgend. woe , MOH. Moero, MOHXTj. MOCMy , MOHMTj. Moe , JJu MOJ I HXT>. MOHMTj , MOHMH. O MOCMTj , O MOHXL. i5o. The possessive pronoun ceon, is used instead of MOH > when the possession relates to the nominative of the phrase , ex. a. 6epy iiijumy , I take my hat ; OHTJ MHt noKasa^n* GiiGjiiomeKy , he shewed me his library. When the possession does not relate to the nominative of the phrase , MOH , THBOH , ero , Hann> , BaiiTb , are employed , ex. OHTJ HtHBenrb BT> MOCMTJ 4,oMt , he lives in my house ; a qn- jnaio mBOK) KHnry , I read thy book. CBOH and jiiEoii are declined in the same manner as MOH. M. F. N. Plu.ofallgend. ]Vom. HaiiTb, our. nauia , name , Gen. Hamero , Hamefi , HaiiieH , Dat. HaineMy , Ace. Haui S^> , < \ ero Ins. Hainy Haineio nauiero , HauieMy , name , HaniHMTj, Ham i MI. aui< Prep, o HameMTj, o Hainea, o HanieMi), o HauinxT>. { I2 9 $ i5i. The possessive pronoun eawb , your, is declined in the same manner as Hami>. i5s. In the Russian language there are no possessive pronouns for the third person singular or pluial; but this defect is sup- plied by the genitive case of the personal pronouns OHT> , he, ona , she and OHH , they; as , ezo his , en , her, and nxi , their. These pronouns being themselves taken from an ob- lique case are indeclinable , and subject to no variations of gender. -V^-'X-^V-'W'^'VX.'^,'^. ^*V%< THEME XIX. ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. We should consider virtue as our best friend , for it is the source of our happiness, our ho- nour and our peace. 1 honour my parents, for to them 1 am indebted for my life and education. we should, MM AOJffiHbi. peace , consider, noHnmamt. parent, as, (expressed by the for, 1160. ins. case) I am indebted, o6fl3airb. Lest, jiyqmin. for (expressed by the for it is , n6o oea ecmb. ins. case.) the source, ii cTno^HHRTj. life, >KH3Hb. happiness , ciacmie. educatioUjBocnmnaHie. honour, Avoid anger: it disfigures thy face, and still more thy mind. Speak not upon a subject, that is above thy capacity. Homer and Vir- gil are famous tor their works. Be faithful to thy sovereign. The eagle; in its rapid flight, soars above the clouds. Endeavour to cultivate thy understanding, to ennoble thy mind and to strengthen thy body. avoid , Geperiicb , gov. the gen. anger , rHtBi>. disfigures, oGeaoGpa- face , and still , n eu;e. more , mind , speak not , He upon, o, gov. the prep. is above , npeBbiuie , gov. the gen. capacity , iionaraie. Homer, OMHpi>. Virgil, Bnprkjiiii. are famous , cjiaBHbi. for , no , gov. the dat. work , raBopeaie. be , 6yA faithful , Sovereign, the eagle , ope.ni. rapid , Gbicmpbiir. flight, nojienrb. soars, B03HocnmcH. above , npeBwme. cloud , 66jiaKO. endeavour, cmapaHca. to cultivate , oGpaao- understanding, yMi>. to ennoble, oGaaropo- to strengthen , body, rai^io. C ' 3l J SECT. V. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUJTS. DECLENSION OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Plu. of all gen. cik , these. M. F. N. N. ceii, this. cih , cie, G. cero , ceii, cero , D. ce M y , ceii, ceMJr, A. ceT' I ro ciio , cie , I. CHMT>, cero, CHMl , P. CCMT> , o ceii , CCM1 M. F. TV. > N. mom-b , that. ma , mo, G. moro , moil, moro, D. moMy, moii, mo My, A. 5 mi, mo{ Jro, -jr, mo, I. mtMT> , moro , mtivii, , en MI. fc. CHMI1. O CHX*. PI. ofallgend. mt, those, mix* , m P. o moMi> , o mofi , i53. In the same manner is declined the demonstrative pronoun smomij , ama, smo, this; excepting the letter *, wliich is changed into H in the ohlique cases ; ex. SIHMMI , dmuMn. &:c. 1 54. Tomi>, may often he rendered in En- glish hy a personal pronoun or substantive ; morni) , Komopofi , he who , or the man who ; ma, Koniopa/i , she who, or the woman who; TOO , Kouiopoe , that vvhich , or the thing which. C '3 ) i55. The demonstrative pronoun OHBIH , CHOC , that, is declined like an adjec- tive of similar termination V. Chap. II. Sect. II. It may often he rendered in En- glish Ly the personal pronoun it, or the said. THEME XX. ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The Emperor Titus considered that day as lost, in which he did no good. Do not re- peat in one company , {that} what you * have heard in another. Those people are unhappy, who are always discontented with their condi- the Emperor, Hivinepa- company, 6ect/i,a. raopi). have heard ^ c./ibimajrb. Titus , Tiinrb. another , ApyroS. considered , cunmajiTj. are unhappy , ajiono- day , A.eHb. as lost, nomepaHHbiMTj. people, he did , HC CAijiajii). always , nogood,HiiqeroAo6paro. are discontented, He- do not repeat , He no- Aor.ojii.Hbi. condition, cocmoimie. C 33 tion. Labour strengthens the body, and idle- ness debilitates^ (V. i5>.) This punishment is proportioned to thii crime. This hill , this grove, this field and this humble cottage re- mind me of my native place. A\\ these statues, these monumental inscriptions, these majes- tic ruins, this silence, this solitude, these great names attest times of past glory. It is impossible to describe the (that ecstasy, which labour , strengthens , enrb. the body , mt.io. idleness, n debilitates , pa statue, monumental, na,4rp66- Hbllf. inscription majestic, punishment, is proportioned , co- pa3Ml3pHO. crime , npecmynaeHie. hill, grove , field , nojie. humble , CKpOMHUB. cottage remind, gov. the ace. native place , po all , Bet. run, silence , 6e3ivi6jiBie. solitude , name , HM. attest, time past, npomeKuiiii. glory , c^aBa. it is impossible, ne MO/Kerirb. to describe, H3o6pa- ecstasy , cocmoprij. C -34 ) fills the mind , when you enter the church of St. Peter for the first time; when _you slaiid upon this vast pavement, between these stu- pendous columns, before these brass pillars, at the sight of all these paintings, these statues, of all these mausoleums, of ?ll these altars, under this cupola. fills , BocxHiqaenrb. the mind, Ayiiia. you enter, Bxo^nuib. church of St. Peter, u,epKOBb CB. Ilernpa. for the first time , BI> nej>BbiH pa3i. you stand , cmoHiiib. vast, npocmpaHHbiH. pavement, noMOcmb. between , mem^y. stupendous , yatacHbiii. column , no^nopa. before , npe^. brass , 6poH30Bbiii. pillar, KOJioHHa. at the sight, npH painting, Kapmnna. statue , cinamyH. mausoleum, altar, under, 11041*, gov. the ins. cupola , Kyn. SECT. VI. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. i56. The indefinite pronouns are: H*KO- mopbiH , a certain; H*KUIO, somebody; H'femiio, miio H ii uy4b, something; HteKOJibKo , a few; 1111611, some; KIIIO ^uiGo, Kino nnGy4b, any body; 4pyroii , another; 'imo jiwGo, any thing; BCflklH, every-one; Ka/K4biii , each; HMKUKOII, not one. i5j. The above indefinite pronouns are declined as Kouiopbiii , Kino, qmo &c. without regard to the indeclinable particle , whether prefixed or added to the pronoun , ex. Nom. Krao jindo. H*Kmo. Gen. KOTO jmGo. HtKoro. Dat. KOMyjiiiGo. HtKowy. Ace. Koro jinGo. HtKoro. KOTO Prep, o KOMT> anGo. o H^KOMTJ* o KOMTJ Kmo KOFO Kowy Nom. qrno Jiu6o. Gen. iero Jin6o. Dat. qeMy ^11160. Ace. imo juiGo. Ins. Prep, o Htirno. O 4CMTJ THEME XXI. ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. All complain of the weakness of ibeir me- mory, but none complain of the weakness of their understanding. Every (each) man must die. Every day brings with it something new. Jn this world there is nothing permanent. Do good and fear no one. Not a minute can be called ours, but the present. Nothing corrupts the manners so much , as bad society. Man , complain , HtJ of , na , gov. the ace. the weakness , cjia- Gocmb. memory , complain, understanding, ywb. must , AOj/KeHT). die , yMepernb. day , ACHb. brings , npiinocHiirb. new , HOBaro. n , CBtQTb. there is, Htnrb. permanent, nocmoflH- II LIU. do good , A*JiaH Ao6po. fear , Cofica. minute , MHHyma. can , He MowenTb. be called , Ha:!Bami,cs. but, KpoMt, gov. the gen. the present, HacmoAmiS. corrupts , He nopirmnrb. manner, bad , society , 66m,ecmBo. whatever be his condition , has always a certain kind of vanity. whatever be his condi- always , tion , KaKoro 6w co- kind , cmoflHia HH 6bijn>. vanity , miijecjiaBie. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS. Our native country. Tf 7 hat is our native country? the place, where we were born; the cradle , in which we were rocked; the nest, in which we were cherished and brought up; the earth, where lie the ashes of our forefathers and where we ourselves what is , mno raaKoe. our native country, omeqecinBO. the place , cmpana. where , r^t. were born, po^HJiwcb. the cradle, KOJibi6ejib. were rocked , the nest , we were cherished, co- rpiirrw. brought up , Bocnkraa- Hbl. the earth , aeiviafl. lie , jieJKanrb. the ashes , Kocmn. forefather, omeirb. -where , shall lie , ( -38 ) shall lie. What spirit dares to break asunder these sacred ties ! what heart can be insensible to this holy flame ! The very birds and beasts are attached to their birth - place, and shall man, en- dowed with a rational soul, estrange himself trom his country and his fellow-citizens? M^hal wretch is there, who has no affection for his mother? and is our native country less to us , than our mother ? The antipathy to this unnatural feeling soul , estrange , from , onrb. country , cmpana. fellow - citizen , seweirb. wretch , HSBeprb. has no affection , He jno6nim. mother, and , HO. less , than , the antipathy , ornBpa- spirit, dares , to break asunder, pac- moprHynib. sacred , Kptntciii. ties, ysw. can be insensible, MO- iKenrb HeqyBcniBOBanib. holy , cBfliu,eHHbiii. flame , a bird , a beast, 3Bbpb. are attached , birth-place, Mtcmo poat- and shall man , iejio- to , onrb , (from). Blbtoj JIH. unnatural , npomnBy- endowed , OAapeHHbiii. ecmecniBeHHbiH. rational , pasyMHMH. feeling , c is so great, that whatever immorality and vileness we may suppose in a man, even if we were to imagine to ourselves , that such a one may be found, who actually harbours in his corrupt soul hatred towards his native country, still, even he would be ashamed to confess it publicly. All ages, all nations, heaven and earth would cry out against him : hell alone would applaud him. Shishkojf. harbours , numaenrb. hatred , HeHaBHcmb. still even , o^HaKO JKC. would be ashamed , no- publicly , BcenapOAHo H rpoMorjiacHo. to confess, an age , a nation , Hapo/rb, the earth, aeivijiH. heaven , neGeca. would cry out, JIM Gbl. against , npomHBTi. hell alone, OAHHTJ a^b. HbiH. would applaud, actually, A -b% great whatever we may sup- pose , KaKyK) 6bl HH nOJIOyKHJIM Mbl. a man , Hejiofitfrb. im moral ity,xy4aH HpaB- cmBCHHocmb. vileness , GeacrnwA- cmBo. even if, xoma 6w 11. we were to imagine , may be found , such a one corrupt , soul HO. CHAP. V. VERBS. SECT I. G E H E R A L REMARKS. $ 1 58. The verb is apart of speech, which expresses the action , state of being , or suffer- ing of an object. Verbs may be divided into active, passive, neuter, reflective, reciprocal, and cornmon. 159. All verbs are either transitive or in- transit we. A transitive verb expresses that sort of action , which passes over to an object; * as, if we say; OHT> jToGnnrb, he loves; the ques- tion whom? naturally arises, and the phrase is not complete , until \ve add: CBOC Auma, his child, CBoero onina , his father , or some other object. Intransitive verbs express existence in a particular stale, or an action, which does not pass over from one object to another; as, OKI. ciiHnrb , he sleepy; a xorcy, I walk. * It is the more necessary to pay attention to this distinc- tion , as in the Russian language the accusative case is frequently different from the nominative V- 10. C 141 ) $ 1 6\>. Russian verbs are subject to modifi- cations according to their branch^ mood, tense, number , person and gender. 161. The branches . being peculiar to the Russian language, require a more explicit de- finition. If we consider the duration of an. action from the commencement to the end, we shall find, that it is subject to a great variety of modifications , thai have no relation to time. These variations of the meaning of the ori- ginal verb are commonly marked in English by tho prefix of some explanatory verb or adverb; but four of the principal are expres- sed in the Russian language, by varying some of the letters of the verb itself. As the expla- natory word used in English may be pre- fixed to the verb in its different tenses , so in the Russian language, each of these principal modifications has its own tenses and moods, which taken collectively form , what is called a branch of the verb. There are four branches : the indefinite *, the perfect, the semelfactive and the iterative. The indefinite expresses the action indeter- minately with rega.d to its completion- as, inporajiij, he moved. * A few verbs Jiave a fifth branch called the definite V. table V of ilie irregular verbs. { '42 ) The perfect marks the thorough accomplish- ment of the action as, OHT> pacmporajib , he moved thoroughly, or has moved. The semefy 'active expresses the sudden and single occurence of an action; as, cmp:k.ifaHynib, to shoot (once). The iterative marks the frequent repetition of the action' as, crnp'LiHBamb , to fire away, or to fire repeatedly. . Rem. Not every verb has all the four bran- ches , as the nature of the action sometimes precludes the use of one or the other of them. This will be better understood by the following examples: inaramb , to stride, may be used in. the semelfaclive , as it is possible to say mar- iiymb , to take one stride ; but the verb 6l>ramL, to run has no semelfactive , because the sig- nification of a repeated motion is inseparable from the nature of the action. 162. Mood. There are three moods in the Russian language : the infinitive , the indica- tive and the imperative. * 1 63. Tense. There are three principal tenses, the present, the past and the future. * The conditional and subjunctive are formed by the ad- ditioii of the particle 6 BsaiiMHyio 4.oBt>peHHocmh ? virtue unites mankind by inspiring them with mutual confidence ; aaneiainaBT* nucbaio , having sealed the letter ; npoinmaBiiiH KHkry , having read the took &c. ( '44 ) SECT. II. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB 6bimi , to be. $ i6'8. The auxiliary verb 6bimb , has two branches , the definite and the indefinite. DEFINITE BRANCH. INFINITIVE MooD,6wmb, to be. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Sing. Plu. ft (ecMfa) , I am. MW (eciuw), we are. raw (ecu), thou art. Bbi (ecmej , you are. OHT. || C he , ) ona ecm *> is. OHII? l ) . V fc\mb . they are. OHO ) (it, ) OHtJ ^ Past. a Gbui-b, a, o, I was. MM GWJIH , we were, mw 6bijn>, a , o, thou wast. BW GWJIH , you were. GbiJtb, he was. OHM )^ v ObiJiH. they were ona 6w.Aa , she was. OH* OHO 6wjio , it was. Future. H 6yAy , I shall be. MW 6yAeMT>,weshallbe. mw 6vAeuiJ> thou wilt be. uwOyAeme, you will be. om> j v ne > J ona (oyAem>, ?she,\will be. OHH? 6y A yrm> , they OHO\ (it, ) ou4 will be. C '45 ) Imperative mood. Sing. HIM , be thou. i f him ^ Jona vGyAenrb , let^ her >be. (OHO) (it 3 P / H. nw, be ye. nVCfllb ^""^ s.ftv.'iPTrrK . ler^ i-fp >np. OHH J i(( nycrab < )OyAyrni> , let them be. Participle. Pres. cymin , being. Past. GbiBiiiia, been, which was. Fut. 6y4ymiii , which is to be. G e r u n d. Pres. Gy^y^H , being. Past. 6LiBuin , or GbiB-b, having been. INDEFINITE BRANCH. Infinitive mood. 6biBamb , to be. Indicative. Present. Sing. Plu. si 6wBaio , I am. MM GbiBaeMi, , we are. mw 6biBaeuib , thou art. Bbi 6biBaerae, you are. /GbiBaemij, he. she, OHH / ona > . . >obiBaoim>. they OHO ( U 1S " OU * i are. y Past. Sing. P I u. a, o , I was. MU 6faiBa^n,we were. HIM 6biBajii>,a, o, thou wast. BBI GbiBajiH , you were. OHT> 6biBu*b , he was, oHHObiBajnf ~ , )ihey were. OHa bbiBajia , she was. OHt bbiBajiu ^ OHO GbiBajio , it was. Particip I e. Past. GbinaBiiiin, who has been. G e r u n d. Past. GbiBaBinii , having been. 169. The first and second persons singu- lar and plural" of the indefinite branch of the auxiliary verb are almost always omitted in the present tense , and the adjective , which fol- lows apocopated. V. 88. as, H AOBOJICHTJ, \ am content; mw JTEHHBI>, thou art lazy; orn> y'leHt, he is learned; BW cM-kiw, you are bold &c. ^.-v--v.-v--v."v--^. -v--v--v.'x--v,-v,-K/ THEM E XXII. ON THE AUXILIARY VERB. Day is the time for labour, and night for repose. Idleness is a vice. Virtue is its own day , ACHb. repose , HOKOH. the time , Bpeusi, idleness, for, expressed by the gen. a vice, nopoKi>. lahour , mpy/vb. its own (^to herself) ca- night, HO'ib. Bia cebL C -47 ) reward. The end of wrath is the beginning of repentance. A man without fixed princi- ples is the victim of his own passions. There are good and bad people in every nation. Roubles and copecks are coins used in Rus- sia. Boasting and haughtiness are the offspring of ignorance. Our desires are often insatiable. The eyes are often the interpreters of the heart. People are not so liberal of any thing reward , uarpaja. the end, wrath , rirfcBi>. the beginning, repentance, pacKa/mie. without, 6e3i , gov the gen. fixed , meep^biS. principle, npaBmio. the victim , (sport) u- rpajiniije. passion , cmpacrnb. every, B card IT. nation , good , bad , 3*ibiii. people , a rouble , py6jib. a copeck , a coin , Moneina. used , ynonipeGjiAeMaa. Russia, Poccia. boasting, xBacmoBcmso. haughtiness, Ha^ivieH- Hocrnb. the offspring, 4,trnn. ignorance , neBtHce- CIIJBO, desire , Htejiatne. insatiable , Henacbini- the eye, the interpreter, Hc'moji- the heart , cep^qe. of any thing, mi u so , ma KI>. Jiberal, ii^e^pbiii. ( '48 ) as of advice. Pythagoras was the first of the Greek philosophers. The olive branch was a sign of peace among the ancients. The Ro- mans were the greatest conquerors of antiquity. Alexander the great said : if 1 were not Alex- ander, I should wish to be Diogenes. Agri- culture was in high esteem among the Romans. But few Europeans have been in the interior of Africa. God w, was, and will be for ever. Be temperate , and you will be healthy. Be not as of, advice, Pythagoras , ILiearop-b. of, M3i> , gov. the gen. Greek , FpeqecKin. philosopher, MyApeiyb. olive , Mac.AH l iHbiii. branch , Blimub. among the ancients , y a sign , 3Haio>. peace , Mnpi>. a Roman , PHMJIHHHHT>. great , BejikKin. conqueror , no6t/j,H- of antiquity Alexander, said , if, ecjiw , V. 162. note, should wish, xonrfeji-b 6w Diogenes , agriculture , uieemBO. among, y, gov. the gen. esteem , noimenie. but few, He Mnorie. European, EBponeeiri. in , BO , gov. the prep, the interior, BuyrnpeH- Hocnib. Africa , A Bpe.MCHb. healthy, not, HC ; (to precede the yeib.J ( '49 ) envious. To be content is to be rich. Every one is capable of being an enemy, but not every one of being a friend. It is possible to be happy in every condition. The future is hid from us by an impenetrable veil. Being in health, vvo laugh at sickness. Mozart , being still a boy, enchanted every body with his skill in music. The commerce of the Genoese , which was once the first in the world , is now in complete decay. envious, content , rich , 6oranibirf. capable , cnocoGnbiii. of being, (to be render- ed by the infinitive.} friend , 4pyrb. condition, Beanie. it is possible , MOJKHO. happy, 6jiaronojiy,gov. thegen. impenetrable , nenpo- go v, the ins. veil , in health , laugh , at, na,a,b, sickness, Mozart, still , a boy , trans ported, his , V. $ i5o. skill in music , nrpa. the commerce , mop- a Genoese , FeHyeaeirb. once , ifEKorvi,a. complete , decay, yna^,oKi>, There was a time, when all Europe was plun- ged in ignorance. Let thy heart be a stranger *o all falsehood. there was, GMJIO. ignorance, a time , Bpewn. let , 4,3. when , KorAa. thy heart, cep4i;e meoe. Europe, Eepona. a stranger, was plunged , 6hijia no- all, Bc/JKii rpyacena. falsehood , SECT. III. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. INDEFINITE BRANCH. ?INITIVE MOOD, mp6^amb, to touch. Indicative mood. PRESENT. Sing. & mporato , I touch, mfai raporaeuib , thou touchest. OHT> C f he ^ ona /mporaemij, < she /touches. OHO ( (it 3 P / u. MH mporaeMTj , we touch. BW mporaeme , you touch. OHII, oat mp6raioim> , they touch, Past. Sing. n mporajTb , a , o , I touched. iTioi riipora.*T, a, o, thou touchedst. oHb rnporajib , he touched. OHa mporajia , she touched. OHO niporajio , it touched. P I u. Mhi mporajiw , we touched. ELI mporajiH , you touched. OHH , OH* mpora^H , they touched. Future. Sing. x 6y^y raporamb , 1 shall touch, mw Gy^eiiib mporarai> , thou wilt touch. OHT> 1 ( he J ona /Gy^emij mporambX she Vwill touch. OHO 3 (it 3 P I u. MM 6yACM'b mporaiiTb , we shall touch. Bbi Cy^eme niporanib , you will touch. OHM) , ... >6y4ymi> mporamb , they will touch. OHt J * IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. mporaw mw , touch thou. nycmb (oHij ) C him^ , having touched. PERFECT BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. pacmporamb , to touch (thoroughly). INDICATIVE MOOD. Past *. Sin g: a pacmporajn>, a, o, I touched or have touched, mbi pacrnporajn> , a, o,thou hast touched. OHT> pacmp6rajii> , he has touched. ona pacmporajia , she has touched. OHO pacmp6ra.Ao ; it has touched. P I u. MM pacmporajiii , we have touched. BW pacraporajiii , you have touched. OHH , oHt pacmporajiii, they have touched. * The perfect branch expressing the thorough comple- tion of the aciion has no present tense in the active or neu- ter form, ( .53 ) F u t u r e. S i n g. n pacmporaio, I shall touch, mbi pacinporaeiub , thou wilt touch. OHT> \ C he 1 OHII vpacmp6raeim^< she Vwill touch. 0110 J (it * P I u. MH pacuiporaeMTj , we shall touch. Bbi pacmporaerne , you will touch. OHH , ont pacmporaK)im> , they will touch IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. pacmporaii HIM , touch thou. IOH* ) J him) { nycmb cona >pacmporaenrb, let j her >touch. IOHO ) I it J P I u. pacmporaeMij MH, let us touch. pacmporaHme BM , touch ye. nycrab OHH, OH* pacmporaioiTn., let them touch. Participl e. Past. pacmporaBJiiiS, an, ee, who, or which touched. Gerund. Past. pacrnporaBiun , or pacmporas-b 9 having touched. f 1 54 ) SEMELFACTIVE BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. mponymb , to touch (once). IDICATIVE MOOD. Past. * S i n g. H mpoHyjrb, a, o, I touched (once), iiibi mpoHy^b , a , o , thou touchedst. OHT> mpoHy.ii> , he touched, ona mpoHy.*a , she touched. OHO mpoHyjio , it touched. P l-u. MBI mpony^ii , we touched. Bhi mponyjiH , you touched. OHM, oHfc mponyjiH , they touched. Future. Sing. x nrpony , I shall touch, mfai mponeuib , thou wilt touch. OHTJ \ * he i ona JrnpoHeim), / she Will touch. OHO ) ( it ) * The semelfactive branch has no present tense, as it ex- presses the single and sudden occurence of an action , the performance of which is not supposed to allow tin*e for de- scription. P I u. MM mpoHCM'b , we shall touch. Bbi mpoHeme , you will touch. OHM, out mpoHymij, they will touch. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. mpoHb mw , touch thou. 1 {him 1 nycmb sJoHa imponemTj, let c her Mouch. (OHO* (it I mpoHeMt , let us touch. mpoHbme, touch ye. jiycmb OHM, oHt rnponyimj, let them touch. P a rticiple. Past. mpoHyuiiiiH, aa, ee, who or which touched. Gerund. Past. mpoHyBiuH, or mponyBi, , having touched. ITERATIVE BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. mporHBamb , to touch (repeatedly.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Past *. Sing. H mporHBajTb , I touched. mw mporMBa^Tj , thou touchedst. OHTJ mporHBajiTj , he touched. ona mporRBa^a, she touched. OHO inporiieajo , it touched. * The iterative branch is never employed in the present tense. P I u. MM mpornBajiH, we touched. Bbi rnporMBUJiH , you touched. t OHM, onfc mponiBajH, they touched. Participle. Past. mporHBaBiiiiH,aa ? ee, who or which touched. Gerund. Past. mporiiBaBuiH , having touched. 170. The ahove may be considered as a model for the conjugation of regular verbs both active and neuter, but as the final letters mb of the infinitive are not always preceded by the same consonant and vowel as in the verb mpozamb, it is necessary to know, what changes are caused in the conjugation by the variation of those letters. V. 172. SECT. IV. FORMATION or THE BRANCHES, MOODS, TENSES AND PERSONS. $ 171. The infinitive of the indefinite branch - is the root of the verb , and (in all regular verbs) ends in mb, preceded by a, a, t, o,y, e, bi or A. E x a in p I e s. 3Kejidmi> , to wish. BflHyrab, to fade. , to speak. mepe'mb , to rub. , to possess. Mwmb , to wash. , to grind. arfcp/zmb, to measure. ( '57 ) 172. The first person singular of the pre- sent indicative is formed from the infini- tive, by varying the final letters mb according to the consonant and vowel which precede that termination. Formation of the I st - per. sing, indicative. THE TERMINATION dTJIb, Preceded i per bjr CK 6 ind. JIK) my m K CD OB Example. InMcamb , to write, nnujy. Jiiaxamb, to plough , nauiy. HCKamb , to seek , niiry. f KOjieGainb , to shake , Jcbinanob , to strew, chiruip. (ApeMaiTij) , to doze , ApesvuiK). Srjio/iainb, to eulp, TJIOJKV. / I McUamb , to smear, Maniy. jMemainb, to cast, Meqy. iK^iiKainb, to call, K^iiqy. BoeBamb, to combat, BOWK). mpeGoBanib, to demand, mpe6yio q y K>K> yio THE TERMINATION HHTb. Preceded i per. by ind. a vowel K) I p3 Example. cmpournb, to build , cmpoio. f MOJiHmb , to pray , MOJK>. K) . <3BOHHmb , to ring , SBOHIO. , to spuuk , ( '58 ) Preceded i. per. Example. ly. t'js monkmb , to lir-at, monjiio. n mpacj>Hmb, to hit off, mpa^io HC iCJiyadimb, to serve, cjy/Ky. q y fyqiimb , to teach , \qy. * ( > \ptHiKtmb, to decide, pi my. (mamiimb, to drag, maij^y. 'J my j xoAnmb , to walk , XOHCV. ' ' J Boaiimb , to carry , Bo>Ry. . c niy npociimb , to ask , npoiuy. m . jy . njiamiimb , to pay , miaqy. cm . n^y . qncmHinb , to clean , qku;y. THE TERMINATION 7776. Preceded i yper. /rr ind. Example. A* . my i tflAtmt , to see , B& my. Jit pt \ CBCA^mb , to order , BC^K). > 10 Jaeeriimb , to sound, 3Benio. J froptrnb , to burn , ropio. 6, j Mfc 1 c cKopGtinb , to mourn , CKop6^K) f JIK> JmyMiini., to make a noise, ujyiMjuo* | (mepntnib , to suffer , mepn^ro. Ct , my Biicl>inb,to hang, BHiiiy. mfc . qy BepmtJiib , to turn , Bepqy- Rem. i. Almost all the Russian verbs are com- prehended in the above three terminations , amb , umb and mb preceded by tj the other vowels, which occur before the 7776 of the infinitive, are: e o , y , and R. , to pierce , KOJIK). , to draw, many. to measure, Mtpato. mepemb , to rub , m py Rem. 2. The verbs which terminate in amb and wz preceded by t are not all subject to the above mentioned variations, some of them form* ing the first per. sing, without changing the consonant , ex. Kycamb, to bite. Kycaro. Konarrih, to dig. Konaio. ' o , to let. nycKaio. , to weaken, , to harden. , to be able , Formation of the 2. n( ^- per. sing, indicative. $ 178. The second person singular ends either in euib or nuib , and is formed by chan- ging the final letter of the first person into one or the other of these terminations ; as, i st. p ert 2 ntt. p er ^ 1 wish. mejiaeuub , thou wishest. I speak. roBopwzz/6 , thou speukest. 174- The changes, to which the final con- sonant of the first person is subject in the verbs iiuhng in nmb t do not extend to the se- cond , which resumes the final consonant of the iniinitive. inf. 1 st - per. a. nd - per. , to walk. xo-ary , I walk, xo^iiuib. , to ask. jipozvy , 1 ask. npocuuib. TIJI a/77 M nib, to pay. miazy , I pay. ^HCTT/wmi., to clean. or awb. I st - In. ro/772> , when the termination ewb of the 2 nd - person singular is preceded by a vowel or by &; as, jiaeini., thou barkest; jiaionrb, they bark. , thou blowest ; ^yromij, they blow. In ymi , when the termination eiub of the d. p er . slug. i s preceded by a consonant; as, ( I to ) , thou carriesf; Hecyrm., they carry. niiujeiiib, thou writest; nimiyiirb, they wrjte. 4 l y- In firm, when the termination nuib of the 2 nd. p er> sing, is preceded by any vowel or consonant, except a palatal ; as, cmoiiuib , thou standest. cfiioiinrb, they stand. iMH/iiimb, ihou lookest. rjui/ifinrb, they look. 5ty- In ami when the termination nuib of the 2 nd - per. sing, is preceded by a palatal; as, yqinub , thou teat-best, y qanrb they teach. 178. By the above rules , the first person indicative singular may be formed from the infinitive, the second person singular from the first, and the third person plural from the second person singular. These are the only persons of the verb, which present the least difficulty, the others being formed in- variably according to the given example , by changing the termination wb of the second person singular into 7772. for the third; into Mi for the first person plural , and into me for the second person plural ; as , aK>6iimb , thou lovest ; jiio6nTirb, he loves ; juo6nM-b , we love; jn66mne , you love. Formation of the past tense. 179. The past tense of the indicative mood is formed from the infinitive by chan- ging tub into .lit , .ia , AO: Miimamb, to read. ( '63 ) OHT> qmnsurb, he read, ona qnmajia, she read. OHO qHiira.Ao, it read. Formation of the future tense. 1 80. The future indefinite is formed by adding the future tense of the auxiliary verb to the infinitive of the principal verb, as, micanib, to write, fl 6y/iy iiHcamt, 1 shall write. Formation of the imperative mood. $ 181. The second person singular of the imperative mood is formed from ihe second person singularof the indicative present by chan- ging cwb and nuib into n, n or b. 1. When euib is preceded by a vowel , inlo H: ry^aeujfa , thou walkest, ryjinn , walk. 2. When it is preceded by a consonant into n or b : moHeiiib , thou sinkest. HIOHH , sink. BflHeiijb, thou witherest. BHHI> , wither, By changing nuib into n or b : Kpiiqiiiiih, thou cryest. Kpnqii , cry. cnopnuib, thou disputest. cnopb , dispute. S 182. The imperative terminates in w, when the accent falls upon the last syllable of the 1 st -. per. present, and in & ; when on any pre- ceding syllable : roBopio , I speak. roBopn , speak, njiaqy , I weep. njiait , weep. $ i83. The third person singular and plu- ral of the imperative is formed from the same persons of the indicative present, by adding nycmb , ny-cndu. or 40,. nycmb OHT> roBopiinrb, let him speak. nycKaii OHII nnmyrn-b , let them write. Aa GjiarocjioBijrnij ero Bon>, may God bless him. 184. The second person plural is formed from the second person singular of the im- perative by adding me : ^.t.iaM , do tliou. AJLiaifme , do ye. jitoGk , love thou. ^loGnme , love ye. juaib , weep thou. n^avbme , weep ye. Formation of the participle and gerund. $ 180. The participle present is formed from the third person plural of the indicative pre- sent by changing nrb into ujiii , man , ujee. , they believe, BtpyioiniS , he who be- lieves. , they suffer, mepnainiH,he who suffers. 1 86. The participle past is formed from the past tense of the indicative by changing Xb into emin , eiuan, ewee. 6-Braji-b , he ran, GiiraBiiiiii , he who ran. cmpoujTb, he built, cmpoiiBinifi, he who built. ( '65 ) $ 187. The gerund present is formed from the third person plural of the indicative pre- sent by changing the three final letters into a or H , ex. , they follow. c A i\vz, following. ? they serve. cjiyiKa, serving. In common language the gerund frequently terminates in ytn or H>ZH , ex. monynib , to drown. moHyqn, drowning, ryjiamb , to walk , ry.iflK) i m , walking. Formation of the perfect branch, 1 88. The infinitive of the perfect branch is formed from the indefinite by the prefix of a preposition or particle; but as it is im- possible to give determinate rules for the em- ployment of these prepositions with the differ- ent verbs , the following list of those , which most frequently occur , is given with the sub- joined particle in italics. V. 161* o. orpa6nrni> , to pillage. oK^eBemanih, to calum- osaiunb , to irritate. niate. o3Ho6iimi>, to congeal. 0Kpecmkmi>, to christen. o3HL>Hymb, to freeze. oinaro:iiiiiiib, to burden, to petrify. oOBtiiqamij, to espouse. C 66 ) no. to wrestle. , to upset. to spare. to plant. , to extinguish /zocmaBuinb , to place. norh6nymb t to perish. to ruin. to cover. to defile. to roast. wcnopmnrnL, to spoil. ncn.yra.mb, to frighten. to turn yellow. Trocmpoumb , to build. , to pound. ncmouhmb , to heat. Mc-mpammnb , to spend to tear. , to boil. cosptrab , to ripen. 11 ' r \ . to lead. cbicnarnb , to find. , to transport. CKyuiarrib , to eat. cro|vbnib,to burn,; neutj. cneib , to bake. , to move. cmepenib, to nib. , to do. cxo/i,;imb , to go. 603. tf36tciinjb,to exasperate. , to smother. 3 M op 63 H m b, to congeal , to pierce. (act.) pas. , to enrich, jiasjiowdmb , to break. to awake. pacmaaidb, to melt. >j to divide. jpacmporauib, to touch. na. , to feed. Hanuca.mb , to write. to water. /tapucofiaiiib , to draw. 6bl. to whiten. . Bcmpljqanib , to meet. to end. to deprive. , to oflend. to feel. ouiyrniinib. noHiiMainb, to understand, noii/nnb. nocoGjaoib , to assist. nocoGkinb. nocbu^ainb , to visit. noclirniirnb. npoujiamb , to pardon. npocmiiinb. , to allow. nyomknib. , to charm. to bear. pliiiianib , to decide. ctia65Kamb , to furnish. coBepiuamb , to complete. coBepmnrah. cmynamb , to tread. cmynknib. to dismiss. , to abolish. yno/i,o6jiHmb, to compare. y*ipe>KAanTb, to establish, xeamainb , to catch. xBarakrab. to shew. 190. The future perfect is formed by the prefix of a preposition or particle to the pre- sent tense of the Indefinite, ex. n numy, 1 write, a uaiiiimy, 1 shall write. But the future tense of those verbs, which have no preposition prefixed, is formed from the infinitive in the same manner as the present of the indefinite branch, see 171, ex. Gpocumb, to throw. 6p6iuy , I shall throw. All the other moods and tenses of the per- fect branch are formed in the same manner as the indefinite. Formation of the semelfactwe branch. $ 191. Those verbs, which have the semel- faetive branch , form the infinitive by changing the termination of the indefinite into nymb ex. nyrarnb, to frighten; nyrnymb, to frighten (oncej. MejibKarnb , to sparkle , iwejibKHynib, &c. In some instances the consonant , which precedes the final termination of the infini- tive is omitted, and in others changed, ex. ABiiramb , to move, ABHuymb. Kpii'iamb , to cry , KpiiKHynib. When the letter j, occurs before the termi- nation nyrnb , the soft sign b is inserted, ex. KO^iomb, to - pierce, KOJibHyrrib. crnpluamb, to fire, CHiptanHyoih. 192. The future tense of the semelfactive branch is formed by omitting the final letters 7776 of the infinitive , ex. inarnyrnb , to stride, a inaruy, I shall stride. jg3. The other modifications of this 8 ( -7 ) branch are the same as those of the indefinite. Formation of the Iterative branch* $ 194. The infinitive of the iterative branch is formed from the infinitive indefinite by changing the final letters into bieamb or neamb ex. crnpfcjiAmb, to fire, pi>3amb , to cut, When o occurs in the last syllable but one of the infinitive indefinite it is changed in the iterative into a, ex. roBOpnmb , to speak, roBapiiBamb. In the formation of the iterative branch the consonants are subject to the variations, marked in 5 , ex. xoAJimb , to walk. xa5KHBamb. npocnmb , to ask. npaiiiHBamb. , to catch. C i7 ) THE M E XXIII. ON THE CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE AND NEUTER VE RBS. People have very different ideas of beauty. Without friendship life has no * charms. We love the place of our nativity. The moon boi'- 7-ows its light from the sun. The end crowns the work. Pure air helps much towards the people, to have very different , idea , nonamie. beauty , Kpacoma. friendship , 4pyat6a. nO , HUKaKOH. charm , npejtecmb. to love , place , nativity , the moon , to borrow, sauMcmeo- eamb. licfht , cBtmi). from, ornt, gov. the gen. the end , KOHeo,i>, to crown , the work pure , iii< air , B03Ayxi). to help , cnocoCcmeo- earnb. towards , KTJ , gov. the dut. * The Russians employ a double negation, which lias the same signification as the single negation in English; as, to have no charms, ne HM&JJI& HiiKaKOH npe.*ecraii. * * curing of disease. Thou thirstest after glory, and he seeks riches. But few do good merely for the sake of good. You like foreign countries , and I love my native country. If thou buyest, what is superfluous , thou wilt soon sell what is necessary. The improvement of the telescope has greatly contributed to the modern discoveries in astronomy. The ancient Egyptians did not the curing, najiliqenie. to buy, noKyndmb. disease , GojitaHb. what is superfluous , to thirst, jKciTK^amb. (after, expressed by the gen.) glory , CJiaBa. to seek , ncKdmb. riches , GoramciiiBO. but few, ticMHorie. to do good , meopiimb 4,06 po. merely for the sake of good, no OAHOH mojibfco jitoG- BH KT> soon , mo CRopo. to sell , npoAaadmb. what is necessary, ny/K- HOC. the improvement, yco- foreign, a country , icpau. native country, ome- qecmfio. if ec.au. the telescope , meje- CKOITb. greatly , MHOFO. to contribute, cnocoff- cmvoeainb. modern, HOBbiii. in astronomy, acnipo- discovery , oinnptiniie. ancient, ^penHiii. Egyptian, Eriimnmiinrb. ( '73 ) know the use of paper , but wrote upon the leaves of a plant , called papyrus. To lie is to forget God, and to fear man. To gamble is to throw our fortune into the sea, in hopes, that we may pick it up again upon the shore. Trust in God. Observe the principles of honesty on all occasions. Judge not of things by their external appearance alone. He who keeps to know, 3namb. the use, ynompeG^eHie. paper , Gyaiara. to write, nncdmb. a leaf, juicrm>. a plant, pacmljuie. papyrus, nairiipycb. to lie , Jizanib. is , 3Ha moio Ha- that we may, again, cHoea. to pick up , coGpdmb. it, oHoe. shore , Geperb. to trust , ynoedmb. in , na , gov. the gen. to observe , xpamimb. on , BO , gov. the prep, all , BCHKin. occasion , cjyqair. principle, npaemio. honesty, to judge, a thing by , no , gov. the dat, alone , OAHOH. external appearance, HapyjKHocnib. he , qejioBlsKij. to keep ; xpanumb. ( '74 ) silence , may observe the follies of others without discovering his own. Pliny wishing to explore the cause of the eruption of Mount- Vesuvius , sacrificed his life to his curiosity. Cicero in his oration against Catilina, said: it is impossible that thou shouldst remain with us any longer; I will not allow it, I will not bear it , 1 will riot suffer it. / came , I saw, I conquered. Many of the works of the an- silence , to observe, npitMtzdmb. of others , qyndji. a folly , to discover , eanib. his own Pliny , to wish , J to explore , the cause , eruption , mount , ropa. Vesuvius , to sacrifice, noJKepmeo* earnb, curiosity, jiioGonbiracniBO life ; JKH3HJ,. Cicero , oration , against, Catilina , KammiiiHa. to say , c-Kasamb. with us , c-b Ha.MH. to remain, 6bimb,gov. the clat. any longer , GOJIMUC. it is impossible , ne- B03MOJKHO. to allow , Hocumb. to bear , mepnimb. to suffer , nycKarnb. to come , npittniH , irr. past tense , to see , , to conquer, work , coiiiHenie. 3 cients are lost. The autumn set in and the leaves faded. A favourable wind fated our sails, and the ship /fcw rapidly through the waves. An apple , which fell from a tree , discovered to Newton the law of gravitation. The huntsman hallood and the hounds started. The lightning flashed, and the thunder roared. Virgil has drawn many ideas from iiomer.The past is irrecoverable. the ancients, to lose , noziiGdnib. to set in , Hacmynumb. the autumn, oceHb. a leaf, to fade , favourable , 6jiaronpi- wind, Btrnpij. tO fill , HaAJTTJb. a sail , napycij. the ship , Kopa6^fc. to fly , Jiemimb. through, no, go v. the dat. a wave , BOJina. to fall , yndcmb. from, CT>, gov. the gen. to discover, Newton , gravitation , nie. the huntsman 9 oxorn- HHKTj. to halloo , KpUKHymb. to start , ecnpfiHymb. the hounds , ronqie. to flash , faiecnymb. lightning , Mojinia. to roar , ^f)AHymb. Virgil, BiiprHjiiif. to draw , nozepnnjmb. idea , Mbicjib. from , H3-b. Homer , to pass, is irrecoverable, HCBOS- BpamnMO. Some saltpetre which exploded in a mortar suggested the idea of inventing gunpowder. At the Olympic games poets used to read their verses, and orators to pronounce their orations. to explode, ecn^ixnymb. Olympic, a mortar, cmynKa. game, nrpa. saltpetre , cejiimpa. a poet, noanrb. to suggest, noddmb. verses, cmnxornBopenie. the idea , noBo^. to read , znmarnb. of, KTI , gov. the dat. an orator, Opamopij. inventing, usoGpimeHJe to pronounce,ao06>/yW/77&. gun-powder, nopoxij. an oration, pt l ii>. SECT. V. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. S 190. The mode of expression, called by grammarians a passive verb , is formed in the Russian language (as in English) by pie- fixing the auxiliary verb 6bimb , to be, in its different tenses to the participle passive; as, OH-b BCtMH JlK)f)HMT>, he is beloved by all , OHfc 6hijrb BctMH noqwrnacMij , he was respected by all ; ToMep-b Gy^eim, qiimam, uc-feMM BtKa.Mii. Ho- mer will be read in all ages. ( '77 ) 196. The distinction of gender is carried through all the tenses of passive verbs ; as , OHT> nocjiaHii, he is sent. oHa 6bijia nocjiana, she was sent. OHO GyAenrb nocjiauo , it will be sent. 197. In the infinitive mood , the participle is apocopated , and put in the dative case ; as, Gbjmb juo6kMy, to be loved. 198. The participle passive of the present tense is formed from the first person plural indicative present, by changing z into bin, an, oe, as, MBI juoGHMij, we love, juoGiiMbiir, a;i,oe, beloved. Mjbi mepsaeMi), we tear, mepaaeMbni, aa, oe, torn. 199. The participle past is formed from the past tense of the indicative , by changing fz into HHbin , HHCIR , nnoe , for the perfect, indefinite and iterative branches, oirb A'Liajifc, he did. AfejiaHHbiii , done. OHI> HajiHcajiTj, hewrote. HaniicaHHbiH, written. OHij ABHrajnj, he moved. ^BiirMBaiiHbiH, moved. 200. The participle passive of the semel- factive is formed from the past tense of the same branch , by changing AT> into mbiii, mast, woe; as , oiiTj KHfiyjij , he threw, KiruynibiH, thrown. OHi> mpoiiyjrb, he moved, ni[ 611 \nibiii, moved. ( '78 ) CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. INDEFINITE BRANCH. INFINITIVE 31 o o D. Pres. 6bimb rnporaeiviy, to be touched. Past. Gbimb mporaHy , to have been touched. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Sin g. H mporacM-b , a , o. I am touched, raw mporaeivrb , a, o, thou art touched. OKI. mporaorb, he is touched, ona mporaeMa, she is touched. OHO mporaeMO , it is touched. P I u. Mbl ^ f WG ) [ BM VmporaeMbi, J you Vare touched. OHH, OHli* ( they} Past. S i n g. ji 6w^T>, a, o, mp6raHT>, a, o, I was touched, mbi GbiJii), a, o, rnporaHT}, a, o, thou wast touched. OHT>6bijn> mporaub, he was touched. oHa 6bua raporana , she was touched. OHO Gbiao mporano , it was touched. MM ^ ^we ^ Jvou Y BU >6bijin mporanbiy)ou >were touched. OHH, OHli} \ they J F u t n r e. Sing. Gy/ty mporairb , a , o. 1 shall be touched. inporaHb, a, o, thou wilt he touched. mporatrb , he will he touched. ona GyAenrb mporana , she will he touched. OHO GyAenrb mporaHo , it will he touched. P I u. MM Gy^eai-b mporaHbi , we shall he touched. BW Gy^eme mporanw , you will he touched. OHH ; out 6y/i,ynnj rnporanbi, they will he touched. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. mporaeMij , a , o , he thou touched. (oHijj f /ofia vGyA nycrnb/ofia vGyAerm> mpo- let/ her v be touched. 'oHoJraeMT>, a, o, 'it * P I u. ^OHII? iiycmbc >6y4yimj mporaeiMbi . let them be ton- i ju "i " ched. Pa rticiple. Pres. mporaeMbiH, aa,oe,who or which is touched. Past.mporaiiHbiM,aa, oe, who or which was touched. Gerund. Pres. Gy^yqii mporaeMi) , a, o, being touched. Past. 6bJBi or GWBUIII mporaH*, a, o, having beeu touciied* PERFECT BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. Gbimfc pacmporany , to be touched (thoroughly). INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Sin g.' n pacmporau-b, a, o, I am touched. mw pacirrporaHt , a , o, thou art touched. OH-b pacmporam, , he is touched. OHa pacmporana , she is touched. OHO pacmporano , it is touched. P I u. MM 1 Cwe ^ BM /pacmporaHbixyou >are touched. OHII, OHtj (they* Sing. R 6bMi> , a , o , pacmporaHij, a, o, I was touched. raw 6wjii>,a, o, pacmporaHt, a, o, thou wast touched. OHTJ 6bUT> pacmp6ram> , he was touched. OHa 6bua pacmporana, she was touched. OHO Gtuo pacmporano, it was touched. P I u. MM BW >bUH acmoranbiou were touched OHM . } Cwe ^ >6bUH pacmporanbixyou > , OH1>) (the) 3 ( '8, ) IMPERATIVE MOOD. 6y4b pacmporaHij, a, o, be thou touched. f'oirb^ ihimj nycmb/oHa >6yAeim> pac- let.^her /be touched. (OHO) mporaurb, a, o, (it 3 P I u. pacmporaHbi, be ye touched. ? >6yAynrb pacmporaiibi , let them be OH *S touched. Participle. Past. pacrap6raHHbiii, aa, ae, which was touched. Gerund. Past. GbiBb or CWBIIIH pacmporamj, a, o, having been touched. SEMELF ACTIVE BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. 6iiim> mpoHymy , to be touched, (once.) INDICATIVE MOOD. . P a s t. S i n g. a. 6biJiT>, a, o, mpoHynrb, a, o, I was touched. mw Gbun>, a,o, rapoHym-b, a, o, thou wadt touched. oHb Gbiji-h mpOHyrat, he was touched. oiia Gbua mpoHyrna, she was touched. OHO Obuo mponymo, it was touched. ( '82 ) P I u. MM 1 rwe 1 Bbi >6biAHiJTp6Hymbi,were touched. OHH, OH*) (they 3 Future. Sing. a 6y^y mpoHynrb, a, o, I shall be touched. HIM 6yAeiiJL rnpoHynrb, a, o, thou wilt he touched. OHT> Gy^em-h niponynrb , he will he touched. oHa GyAenrb mpofiyrna , she will he touched. OHO 6y/^erai> rnpotryino , it will he touched. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. 6y4,b mpoFiynrb , a , o , he thou touched. roHi> \ rhinn nycmb/oHa ^-GyAennj mpo- lety her >be touched. 'OHO J nyim> a , o , (it 3 Participle. Past. raponynifaiH , aa , oe , who or which was touched. Gerund. Past. GWBT> or GbiBUiH mpoHynrL , a, o, having been touched. ITERATIVE BRANCH. INFINITIVE MOOD. 6wrab mporHBany , to be touched (repeatedly). C -83 ; INDICATIVE MOOD. Past. Sing. x Gbu-b mpornBani. , a, o, 1 was touched, mw 6bUb, a, o, mporiiBaHTj, a, o, thou wast touched, oirb 6bui> rnporwBafib, he was touched. oHa 6hMa mponiBawa , she was touched. OHO GbiJio inpornBaiio, it was touched. P I u. MM ~\ fwe ^ BW > )bijin mporMBaiibi/you Vwere touched. OHH, OHL* f they 3 Participle. Past. mporHuaHHJaiii, aa, oe, which was touched. Gerund. Past. 6biBi> or GbiBiuw mponiBaHi), a, o, having been touched. THE M E XXIV. ON THE CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. Egotism is frequently punished with contempt. Sicily is subject to frequent earthquakes. It is egotism, cavicuioGie. Sicily, C frequently, qacmo. to subject, to punish , nakasbieamb* earthquake , coiitempt , npeapitfie. ceaie. ( '84 ) related , that Romulus and Remus were suckled by a she-wolf. Man is created with fa- culties , which distinguish him from all other creatures. At the sight of Achilles' tomb Alexander was moved to tears. The greater part of our knowledge is drawn from the works of the ancients. Hypocrisy is a tri- bute , paid by vice to virtue. The good, they relate, Romulus , Remus , to suckle , eocKopMiimb. a she-wolf, to create ; comeopumb. a faculty, 4apoBanie. to distinguish, OIUJIH- from , onrb , gov. the gen. other, npoiiif. creature , msapb, gen. plu. niBapeii. t , npn , gov. the prep. the sight , BHAT>- Achilles', Axmueco- BOII. tomb , Alexander, to move, to , 4,0 , gov. the gen. a tear , cjieaa. the greater part, 66^i>- uiafi qacmb. knowledge, sHanie (to be put in the plu.) to draw, nozepriHymb. from, H3i> , gov. the gen. work , mBopeine. the ancients, Ap^^Hie. hypocrisy , JiiiH,eMlipie. tribute, AQHb. to pay, n.iamumb. vice , nopoKi>. virtue , to do , the good , ( '85 ) done by us , should be forgotten , but that received kept in perpetual remembiance. A man , whose mind is illumined by the light of truth, observing all around him traces of the power and goodness of the Creator is lost in asto- nishment; but minds, plunged in ignorance or infidelity, amidst the innumerable wonders of the universe see nothing but chance: like those unfortunate beings , whose eyes are should be forgotten , but , a. (that , not expressed ) to receive , noA)Zumb* kept in perpetual re- membrance, BtMHO nOMHHIIIb. to illumine , osapAmb. truth , p/fepa , faith). to observe , ycwarnpn- all around him, a trace , cjit/rb. power, BceMorymeciiiBo* goodness, Gjiarocmb. the Creator, Co3Aamejib. is lost in astonishment. HMTj. a mind, to plunge, ignorance, Heirfe/KecmBo infidelity , amidst , innumerable , CJlCHHblH. a wonder . the universe , to see, nothing, but, chance , like, those , mfc. an unfortunate being , HeciacmHbiir. whose , Koero. , Cexcept.) naH. no4,66Hbi. ye OKO ; pi. ( '86 ) deprived of sight; although they may turn to- wards the light of the sun, yet they discover nothing, hut gloomy darkness. to deprive , jinwumb. light , CBbmi>. sight, 3}vbtiie. yet , no. although , xoma. but , KpoM t. to turn , oujjaunarnhca. gloomy , M ipa'iHHH. of the sun, co^HeqHbiw. darkness , meMHoma. (solar, j to discover, SECT. VI. REFLECTIVE, RECIPROCAL AWD COMMON VERBS. 201. Those verbs are called reflective, which denote an action, that recoils upon the agent; OHTJ Moemca , he washes himself; OHT> 6pocaernca , he throws himself &c. 202. Reciprocal verbs denote the action of two or more agents upon each other; as, OHH Gbiomca , they beat each other. 2o3. Reflective and reciprocal verbs arc formed by adding CH or cb (the abbreviation of the pronoun cc6k , self) to all the tenses and persons of transitive verbs; as, n M6io , I wash. H MOHDCB , I wash myself. oHa MbiJia, she washed, ona Mbuacb, she washed herself. 204. Common verbs have the signification of neuter verbs ; as , GoAnibca to be afraid , cmapambCfl to endeavour &c ; and generally express things that happen of themselves , or some internal action of the mind. Common verbs always end in en , without which particle they have no signification. ?.t>5. There are many verbs used as reflective in the Russian language, which are not so in English ; some may be rendered by -a passive and others by a neuter verb,* as, Bt'inocmb osnazdemcji Eternity is represented KpyroMT,. by a circle. Do Mtpt KaKTj Mbi orn^a- In proportion as we jiaeMCH onrb npeAMemoB-b, recede from objects OHH KdxcymcH naMi> Meate. they appear less. C 88 ) CONGUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. INDEFINITE BRANCH. i Infinitive mood, rptmj,ca , to warm one's self. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. S i n g. a rptKX'b , I warm myself, mw rpteuihca , thou warmest thyself, oirh rjf-hemcfl , he warms himself, ona rptjeincH , she warms herself. OHO rp-feemcfl , it warms itself. P I u. Mbi rpteMCff-, we warm ourselves. Bbi rpterrrecb , you warm \ourselves OHH , OH* rptioniea , they warm themselves. Past. Sing. n rptjiCH, I warmed myself, mw rjvkiCH , thou wai % medst thyself. OHT> rpt.ica , he warmed himself, ona rpt.iacb, she warmed herself. OHO rptjiocL, it warmed itself. P I u. MW rptuHCb, we warmed ourselves. Bbi rp-fejincb, you warmed yourselves. OHJI, OHli rpijiucL^ they warmed themselves. Sing. rptmbca , I shall warm myself, mbi GyAeuib rptintca, tiiou wilt warm thyself, ofl-b Gy^ernij rpimibca , he will warm himself, ona GyAeinfc rpi>;nbca , she will warm herself. OHO 6y/i,enTb rpiinbca, it will warm itself. P I u. MW 6y4,eMi> rptrriLca , we shall warm ourselves. Bbi Gy^eme rptmbca, you will warm yourselves. OHM , OH* Gy/rymb rptmbca , they will warm themselves. "IMPERATIVE MOOD. S i n g. rptSca , warm thyself. ioHi) rj>terncyi, ) (him warm himself. oiia rj^eincH, /-leticu, who warms herself. (jNeut. rpiioujeeoj, which warms itself. iMas. rp^BuiiMCH, who warmed himself. Past. V Fern. rptiiiuaiicH, who warmed herself. (Neut. rpiiBiuecoi, which warmed itself. C '9 ) Gerund. Pres. rptflCb , warming one's self. Past. rptBuiHCb , having warmed one's self. PERFECT BRANCH. Infinitive mood, corpiniibCH, to waroi one's self. INDICATIVE MOOD. Past. Sing. x corp*,icn, I warmed, or have warmed myself, mbi corpiijiCH , thou hast warmed thyself. OHT> corpl^ca , he has warmed himself, oaa corptjiacb , she has warmed herself. OHO corpijiocb , it has warmed itself. P I u. MM corptjincb , we have warmed ourselves. BU corptjiwcb, you have warmed yourselves. OHH, oHt corpt.iwcb , they have warmed them- selves. Future. Sing. fi corptwcb , I shall warm myself, mw corpteuibca , thou wilt warm thyself. OHTJ coru*emcH , he will warm himself, ona corptemca , she will warm herself. OHO corp*emcfl , it will warm itself. P I u. MM corpiiCMca , we shall warm ourselves. DM corptemecb , you will warm yourselves. OHM, out corj/fciornca, they will warm themselves. IMPERATIVE MOOD. corpinca , warm thyself. toHi> corptemca , i Jhim warm himself. nycmb<<)Ha corp-feernca, Met. age , Bo.ipacrnia. ivy, iMioiirb. to intwine , oGeiiedmb. round , OKO^O, gov. the gen, oak , a tree , Curtius, to throw down, country, an Englishman, a Portuguese , llopmy- from , BT> , gov. the ace. a precipice, iipoiuicini>. sake , cnaceaie. to distinguish, npoc.id- e a in b. frequent , qacmuu. voyage, nymeiueciiTBie. the world , a Chinese , to consider, noznmdmb. wise , My 4. p bill. people , fiapoAfc. Hippocrates , Fnno- ( '93 ) and Galen are considered as the fathers of the healing art. Gibraltar is considered one of the strongest fortresses in Europe. Gold is tried by fire , and a friend by adversity. Crimi- nals are punished according to the measure of their crimes. In Kamtchatka dogs are har- nessed instead of horses. Diana was represented with a bow, and a quiver full of arrows. Every thing in nature changes. Through all the course Galen , the father, omen,*, healing , BpaqeGnbiii. art, HayKa, (science.) Gibraltar, ruGpajimapi). 5trOllg, CHJlbHbJCT. fortress , Kptnocmfc. Europe, Eepona. gold , 3OAOIIJO. to try, Hcnbimbieamb. fire , oroHb. adversity , necqacmie. a criminal, to punish , according, no, gov. the dat. measure , ivripa. a crime, npecinynjeaie. Kamtchatka, instead, a horse , to harness , a dog, coGana. Diana , 4iaa. to represent, nsofym a bow , jiyKT>. a cjuiver , full , an arrow , craptjia. every thing , see. nature to change , through , BO. all , Bee. the course , meienie. 9 ( '94 ) of this short life , we struggle with diseases , misfortunes, and above all , with our passions. All the world complains of the Inconstancy, of fortune. Virtue does not dread calumny. There are people, who laugh at others, but do not allow others to laugh at them. short, KpamKik, inconstancy, KOjioiipani- life, VKH3HB. HOCHIL. to struggle , 6op6mbcn. fortune , cqacrnie. disease , 6ojit3Hi>. to dread , misfortune, Gt^a. calumny, above all, GOJTBC BCCFO. there are , ecnib. passion, cmpacmb. to laugh, cMt/unbcn. all the world, Becb CBtmij. at, Ha^i*, gov. the ins. to complain , wa^o- but do not , a He. eanjbca. to allow , mepirfcniL. of, Ha , gov. the ace. at, Ha^t, gov. the ins. S . E C T. VII. COMPOUND VERBS. 206. Compound verbs are formed by pre- fixing a preposition to simple verbs, and thereby modifying or changing their original significa- tion; as, ^3caaBnrab , to ^honour &c. Rem. In some instances the simple verb has become obsolete , while the com- pound remains in use ; as , GocKpecumb to raise up nczesdmb to disappear &c. f -95 ) 207. The indefinite branch of compound verbs is formed by prefixing a preposition to the iterative of simple verbs; and the perfect branch by prefixing a preposition to the in- definite simple; as, iieqarnarnb, to seal, pac- nc-HauibiBattib . to unseal: perf. paciieqaniarnh &c. * / I I 208. When the simple verb has the se- melfactive , the compound derived from it has also this branch; as, ABknyrnb , to move (once), BO3ABkrnynib , to erect. CONJUGATION OFACOMPOUND VERB. INDEFINITE BRANCH. Infinitive mood: n 041111 CbiBamb , to undersign. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. S i n g. H no^nkcbiBaio , I undersign* rnw noAirkcbiEaeiub t thou undersignest. OHT> j rhe \ OHU >no / inkcbiBaeim3. < /she vundersio'ns. ' 1 I O it J P I u. MM noAniicbiBaeMTj ? \ve undersign.' Bbi no^nHCbiBaenie , you undersign. OHM, out no^nkcbiBaiomb ; they undersign. Past. S i n g. a, o, I undersigned, mw no/i, nHCbieajT}, a, o, thou undersignedsL OHT> noAnkcbiBajiT) , be undersigned, ona noAnhcbiBajia , she undersigned. OHO noAniiCbiBajo , it undersigned. P I u. MM noAnhcbiBajiH t we undersigned. Bbi HOAUHCHBajifl , you undersigned. OHH, oHt no^nkcbiBajiH , they undersigned. Future. Sing. fl >yxy noAnncbiBamb , I shall undersign, mw 6y4,euib no^nHCbiBarnb, thou wilt undersigi>r OHT>) Oie J ona /Gy/a.ernij no^nkebiBamb,< she>will undersign. OHO) lit ) P t . MM 6y A eMT> noAnHCbiBamb, we shall undersign. Bfai Gy^erne noAUHCbiBamb f you will undersign. yrm>noAnkcbiBamt>,they willundersigo. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. , undersign (thou). Ton* I L hirin nyerawoHa InoAUHCWBaenni, leJher V undersign. (OHO) (it. j c '97 ; P I u. , undersign (ye). nycmbOHi],oHtnoAnkcbiBaK)nn>,letthemundersign. Participle. Pres. no/xiiHCbiBaK)iu,iii , aa, ee, who undersigns. Past. noAHHCbiBaB iu iu, an, ee, who undersigned. Gerund. Pres. noAiiwcbiBaa , undersigning. Past.no/niijcbiBaBniH, having undersigned. PERFECT BRANCH. Infinitive mood. noAniicarnb , to undersign. INDICATIVE MOOD. Past. S i n g. n noAiiHcaji-b , a , o , I have undersigned. nibi jictAnncajfb , a, o, tliou hast undersigned. OH-b noAnucajij, he has undersigned. ona no4nncajia , she has undersigned. OHO no^nucajo , it has undersigned. P I u. MW no^nncajiH , we have undersigned. BM no/xniicajiii , you have undersigned. OHH , OH* no^HMca^n , they have undersigned. F u t u r e. Sing. I shall undersign. noAUHiiieiiib , thou wilt undersign. OHT> ona OHO \ i h N /no^nnuiemi), < she > will undersign, j (it j C '98 ) P I u. MM noAirHineM-b, we shall undersign. BLI no^niiineme, you will undersign. OHM , oHt noAnkiiiymb , they will undersign. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. undersign (thou). l niinri >no/3,nHiuera^, let% her /undersign. (OHO) fit 3 no4nnmjnne , undersign (yej. nycmb OHH, out noAnEtmymfe, let them undersign. Participle, Past. noAnncaBiniii, aa, oe, who undersigned. Gerund. Past. noAnncaBLQH or no^nncaB-b , having under- signed. 209. The prepositions used in the formation of compound verbs are the following: Ee3~b , (without) marks privation, ex. GesnoKOHirrb , to deprive of rest, to disturb. 6e3o6pa3Hirib,to deprive of beauty,to disfigure. Bo y ei> (in)- adds the meaning of the preposition to the simple verb, ex. BcnraBJiAmb , to insert , BOBjieqb , to intrain. Bos , 630 , 63 , (up) marks i st - ascension : BocxoAHmb, to ascend. BSJitcmb, to climb up. 2 ] y- The commencement of an action : ( '99 ) to conceive an affection, , to begin to hate. 3 ! y- Reinstatement : EO3Bpamkinb , to return. BoacmaHOBHrnb, to replace. Bw, j (out) marks i st - the passing of an object from the interior to the exterior , and cor- responds to the latin preposition ex ; as, Bbirnanib , to expel. BbiBO3Hnib , to export. . r a'y- Duration : Bbicmonrnb , to stand all the time. Bbicjiymarnb , to listen to the end. 3'y- Acquirement by means of exertion : , to obtain by flattery. ,~ to obtain by tears. (till , to) marks the boundary , or termi- nation : , to arrive at a certain point. , to read to a certain point. 3a , (for) marks i^- the commencement of an action. saroBOpiimb , to begin to speak. , to begin to boil. - The expansion of the action over an object: , to stop up. , to cover over with colour. ( 200 ) 3ty- Excess: saroBopiimbCH , to say too much, aacnambcfl, to oversleep. 4 1 J- Deviation : aatxami* , to ride off the road. 5ty- Acquirement , by exertion. 3apa66nramb , to earn by labour. 6ty- Descent. saxo,4,HHib , to set , to go down. , (fromj has ist. nearly the same signifi- cation as 6bi , but is used in a more ele- vated style. Hsrnarnb , to banish. nsGparab , to elect, a'y- Wasting by use : cnmb, to wear out. - Exploring. to search out. Ha > (on) marks i st - accumulation: HaGpocamh , to throw in a heap. HaroBapnnib, to speak too much. 2 1 !- Witchcraft: HaroBapHBamb , to foretell. HaKOJiAOBbiBamb , to bewitch. > f (upon) Corresponding to the latin pre- position super. HaAcmp6nrab, to build a superstructure, to superscribe. Hns , (below) marks descent : HH3Beprnymb, to precipitate. HHSxoAkinb , to descend. , o6-b , 060 (about) corresponding to the la- tin preposition circum. , to circumfuse. , to circumambulate. , to embrace. Orm> , (from) i st - tbe separation of parts: ornGkrnb , to detach. oracmaBMHib , to displace. 2ty- Cessation. omniicarnb , to finish writing. omjuiaKamb , to cease weeping. 3 ] y- With the particle CR deliverance : , to disencumber one's self. , to excuse one's self. Ilepe , (over) marks i st - excess: nepenojiHwrnb ,- to overfill, nepecirfcmb , to over - ripen. 2*7- Change of place : nepeakrab, to pour out of one vessel into another. nepeBO3Hrai , to transport, to carry over. 3 y- Joined to the preposition BO3> superiority: npeB3oumiH , to surpass, , to exceL Repetition; ( 202 ) nepenHcamb , to copy (to write over again). nepeiHmarnb , to read over again. JIo , modifies the duration of the action: nonrpamb , to play a little, norocmkmb , to pay a short visit. (under) corresponds in its first signi- fication to the particle sub. , to put under. to subject. , to subscribe (undersign), sty- Approach : 110,4 vfcxamb > to drive up. y (before) corresponding to the p article pre: to predict. , to precede. , to anticipate. JIpn , denotes is 1 - approach: nprfexamb , to arrive. npHKacambCH , to touch. , to unite. Increase : to add. to augment. 3 ] y- Concealment : npHKpbiBamb , to hide under. Hpo t (through) denotes i st - passage: npoHsiimb , to run through, to pass through. 2 ] y- Duration : to stand all the time. 3 ! y- Loss : jjpocnamb , to lose by sleeping. npoiirpamb, to lose by gaining* 4 ! y- with the particle cfi , a fault or mistake : npoGovimaiiibCtf , to speak incautiously. IJpomne-b , (against) marks opposition or con- trariety : npomnBop-fe'iHiiib, to contradict. npomHBycmoAnib , to oppose. Pas , Marks I st - separation : pasoGpamb, to sort. pas^-fejiHmb , to divide. aty- Development : pasBtnamb , to expand. pasBepnymb , to unfold. Sty- With the particle CH , augmentation of the action : pascepAHnibca, to become very angry. Co , CT> (marksj i st connexion : cocmaBiimb , to compound , mix. , to entwine , plait. 2 ] y- Descent : COHUIH , to walk down. cGpocwnib , to throw down. expresses it- departure: ( 204 ) yHecm& , to carry away, y^enrbrnb , to fly away. aty- Arrangement : y6pamb , to place in order, to pack up. Diminution : to decrease, to diminish. 4 1 ?' Opposition : ycraoanib , to resist. 5ty- Persuasion. y6i,4Hmb , to convince. yroBopiirnb , to persuade. 6ty- Retention. , to stop ; to arrest. THEME XXVI. ON COMPOUND VERBS. The northern nations harrassed the Roman Empire by their frequent incursions. The Danube northern, cteepHbiH. Empire, a nation, Hapo4i>. frequent, to harrass, fasnoKonmb. an incursion , HaGt,ri>. Roman , PHMCKIU. the Danube , 4y H ^ ( 200 ) falls into the Black-sea. The sight of the ocean excites admiration. The prayers of the righ- teous ascend to heaven. After the rain the sun shone forth again. It is impossible to recall lost time. The JNeva flows oat of the Ladoga lake. Troy held out a long time, but was taken at last. Priam obtained from Achilles the body of his sou Hector. Paper is made out of rags. to fall , the Black Sea lost , the Neva Hesa. Mope, to flow out , ebirne- the sight, the ocean , to excite , e admiration, a prayer , a righteous man , irpa to go , heaven , ne6o. after , nocjris. the rain , HeHacmfae. agan cuona. to sh i n e- fo rth , eo3ciAmb. to recall , eosepamiimb. Ladoga, Troy , Tpo/r. to hold , at last , to take, B3Hmi>. Priam , IIpiaMT>. to obtain , 6*inpocnmi* Achilles, Axmi./iecT>. SOn , CblHT>. Hector , FeKmop-h. paper ; 6yMara. to make , Of, H31J. * Wlitn the signification of the verb will allow of the separation tke prefix of the preposition isleftfor the No one has ever reached the pole. The Nile overflows the neighbouring countries annually. Speak candidly , but not imprudently. The sun had no sooner gone down , than the nightingale began to sing. The diligent deserve encourage- ment. Vesuvius emits flames. Bees extract honey from every flower. The alchemists endeavoured to a rag , no one , HHKIIIO. ever , eiu,e. to reach, 4,0x0 ^umb. the pole , the Nile , annually, to overflow , 3amo neighbouring, oKpecin- HblH. country , cmpana. candidly, ornKpOBCHHo. to speak , zoeopumb. no sooner, jiMiiib mojn>- KO. to go down, saKamumb- cn. than , nightingale , CO^OBCU. to sing , nimb. diligent , npiuvtiK- Hbllf. to deserve , encouragement , 0,3,0- 6penie Vesuvius , Beayeiii. to emit, nseepedmb. flames , a bee , to extract , honey , a flower , an alchymist , to endeavour to find , ( 20 7 ) discover the means of transforming the base metals into gold. Misers heap up wealth and their heirs spend it. The desires of an ambi- tious man are not easily satisfied. Gipsies tell fortunes by the hand. On the pillars of Hercules were inscribed the words : nee plus ultra. In Rome they used to precipitate criminals from the Tarpean rock. Drunkenness obscures the the means , cn6co6*>. to transform , npespa- base, HH3K1H. metal , Meina^^T}. into , BT> , gov, the ace. gold , sojiorno. a miser , CKynwii. to heap up, HaKonjiAmb* wealth, GorameiUBa, (plu). an heir, Hac^ij^HHKTj. to spend , pacinozdmb. desire , acejianie. an ambitious man, ie- not easily, necKopo. to satisfy, a gipsy, u.biranKa. to tell , Haeoadpneamb. by, Ha, gov. the ace. a pillar, Hercules , to incribe , nee plus ultra , HO 4,3- ^te cero, Rome , PHMTJ. to precipitate, nnseep- a criminal, npecinyn- HHKTj. from, c-b, gov. the gen. Tarpean, TapneiicKiii. a rock , cKa,ia. drunkenness nj>HcmBo. to obscure , ( 208 ) understanding. Captain Cook sailed round the world three times. The dread of shame deters many from criminal actions. Ko one should excuse himself by pleading ignorance of the laws. Satiated with earthly grandeur Char- les V retired to a monastery. Many nomadiun tribes have changed their mode of life , and settled (themselves) in villages. No poet has the understanding, paa- cyAOK-b. Captain Cook , Kami- three times, mpii paaa. to sail round, the world, uech inapt. the dread , onaceme. shame , to deter , many, criminal , an action , nocmynoK'b. (by pleading, expres- sed by the ins.) ignorance , Heawanie. the law , saKOHij. no one , Hincrno. to excuse one's self, omzoeapneambcR. should, HC ACU>KHO. to satiate , npecbiiijdmb. earthly , grandeur, Charles,V.Kapji-bfiambiif to retire , to , 6i>. a monastery , Mona- cmbipb. nomadian , a iribe , Hapo/i,T>. to change, jiepeMt mode , 66pa3i>. to settle , noce^iiiub V. a village, jepeBHfl. a poet, ever surpassed Homer. Dark clouds forebode rain. We should prefer what is useful to that, which is agreeable. In spring numbers of birds Jlock to the north from warm countries. Hypo- crites conceal their vices under a mask oi sanctity. Science enlightens the understanding. Gamesters frequently gamble away all their fortunes. to surpass, npeesoiirnu. Homer , FoMepij. dark , M|>;iiii. a cloud , o to forebode ran , we should , AO to prefer , mdmb. that which is useful , nojieanoe. that which is agreeable , in the spring, eecFioto. to the north, na to flock , many , MHomecmeo. from , H3ij, gov. the gen. warm , men^wH. a country, cmpana. a hypocrite, juineMtpi*. to conceal, Ji}>nKj>bi6dmb a mask , sanctity, science, nayKa, (to be put in the plu.} to enlighten , npocet- a gamester, frequently, qacmo. to gamble away , npo- a fortune , SECT. VIII. IMPERSONAL VERBS. $ 210. A verb is called impersonal, when its nominative or agent is unknown, or con- sidered as such ; this unknown agent is ex- pressed in English by, it,, one , they, people Sec. and in the Russian language as follows : i st> By the third person singular of the re- flective verb. roBopktnca , it is said. KajKemca , it seems. CJiymeiJToi, it happens. rnpeCyemcjj, it is required. yAaeiuca , it suceeds. noBtcuiByemcfl , it is re- lated. sanpeujaemcjj, it is for- noBeatBaemca , it is bidden. commanded. 2 ! y- By the third person singular of active or neuter verbs. Mep3Hemb, it freezes. saBHCunrb, it depends. He^ocraaeinii, it is not na^eatkimj, it belongs. enough. ecmb , there is. npHJiHqecmByeim>, it is proper. , it is enough, maenrb , it thaws. 3iy- By the apocopated participle passive of the neuter gender. c ; o , it is .said. Bejitno, it is commanded. nkcaBo , it is written. npuKaaano, it is ordered. roeopcHo, it is spoken, 'aanpemenojtis forbiden. AO.AJKHO, it must. nosBOJieno, it is permitted. jipeAJiiicaHo, it is ordai- oiinvrBieHo, it is marked. ned. 4 1 ?- By a verb used in the form of an adverb : it is evident. HJTHCHO, it is necessary. 3Ke./iainejiLHo, it is-desirable. yro^no, it, pleases. jKajiocmHo , it is pityable, HSBtcmHO^it isknown. , it is vexing, onacno, it is dangerous. Rem. These, and other impersonals, formed in the same manner, are conjugated with the auxiliary verb , as , Pres. npiiKasano , it is ordered. Past. npiiKaaaHo Gw^io, it was ordered. Fut. npiiKaaaHo Gy^emii, it will be ordered. 5ty- Any active or neuter verb used in the third person plural without a pronoun : nfniiynTb, they write. HanwHafonrb , they begin. roBopami> , they say. CKaawijaiomi., they relate. 6^- By the second person singular of the verb; as, eiviy zoBo^umb^ a OHTJ CMBemc/i, one sp.eaks to him, and he laughs &c. C 212 } $ 211. Several verbs, which are impersonal in English have their subject in the Russian language ; as , rpoivn, rpeMHint, it thunders. MOJHia CBepivaenrb , it lightens. Btmp-b Aycin-b , it blows. 40^4 1> n^einb , it rains. rpa^b ii 46 orb , it hails. CHtn> uncurb, it snows. SECT. IX. IRREGULAR VERBS. 212. Irregular verbs are such as deviate from the general rules of conjugation. 2i3. In the Russian language the irregu- lar verbs are : ist- All monosyllabical verbs, except: aiiiuTih , to know. cntmb , to mature, sptinb , to ripen. nptrrib , lo perspire, rptmb , to warm. C3itmi> , to dare. 4ynib , to blow. m^trnb , to decay. aV- All the verbs ending in the infinitive in zb. 3ty- All the verbs which terminate in the in- finitive in 7776 or /77/f preceded by a consonant. 4 ] y- The verbs , which form the perfect branch without the aid of a preposition. 5!y- The verbs, which have a definite branch. I St. M N O S Y L L A B I C A L V E R B S. In fin. i per & per 3 per* Imp. 6Afcra , to watch. 6fl-K> -KUtb -jim-b 6AH, 6pHlllb , to shave. 6pt>-KJ -eiui. -IOI1I-B 6phw. 6HIIIb, to heat. 6b-K> -euiB -torn* 6ew. spanib , to lie. B P -y -euiB -yui-B Bper. Bbiinb , lo hurl. BO-KJ -euib -loiri-b BOH. BHHIb, to wind. JSB-tO. -euib -torn* BCHT. ran in b , to rot. rni-to -euib -lOIICB rniM. rnyuib , to bend. rH-y -eiub -yin-B run. Apamb , to tear. flpp-y -euib -ymT Aepil. A.inmb , to prolong. A^I-K) -niiiB -am* A^iw. JKflnini . , to exp*ct. jKA-y -eiiib ' -ym* JKAW. JKpa.m i , to devour. -JKp-y -euiB -yinT> J*pl*. JKauib , to squeeze. jKM-y -euiB -ym* JKMH. JKamb , to reap. JKH-Y -eui-b -ym* jKnm. JKHIIlb , to lire. 3KII-B-Y -euiB -ym-b ^HBKT. SBaiub , to call. 30B-y -euib -yiu-B 3 OB 11. apfem* . , to behold. 3p-K) -HIUB -Sill* 3 P n. Kpwm b , to cover. KpO-K> -eiiib .rom* KPOHT. Jiraiiib , to lie. Ji-ry. -meuiB -rym* Jim. Jtbcmii mb , to flatter, jib-my -CUIHUIb -cmain* ABC HI W. JinrnB . , to pour. Jlb-K> -euib -KJIII* JICH. Miami ,, to fly. Mi-y -HUIb -am* M'IM. MHinb . to knead. MH-y -CUIB -ym* MFIH. MHHIO b, to think. MH-10 -nuib -Hum MHHT. Mmnn IB , to cover Miu-y -HUlb -am* MUIW. with moss. Mcmnmb, to revenge. M-my -cmnutB -cmsraii Mcmw. Mbllllb , to wash. MO-K> -euiB -JOIII* MOW. HBJUIB , to cramp. HO-K> -euiB -icin* HOH. numb , lo drink. nb-K> -eiiiB -roni* nejft. n^tbim b , to float. naws-y -euiB -ym* n^biBM ntinb . , to sing. no-K> -ems -win* now. psain f >, to tear* ps-y -euib -ym* pan. 3 per Imp.\ -yui-B p.H. 10111% POH. -toin-B 1JJ.1H. -K>in'B cinema'. -yin-B C. 1MB IT. yni-B cnibiHb. -Kyimi mKtt. -mm* N11U1. -loin's 1UCH. Infinitive i per 2 per , to neigh. pat-y euib , to burrow, po-io -eiiib ., to send. ui./i-io -euib cui.-i.-t in h , to spread. cmeJi-to -eaib c.ii.niii. , to pass for. CAhiu-y. -euib cuibirrib, to conceal, cnibin-y -euib rnKanib, to weave. ni-Ky -icuib Minn in h , to honour. Miuy -HUIB iimnib , to sew. IIIBIO -euib 214 The past and future tenses of these verbs are formed regularly , the former by chan- ging the termination mb ot the infinitive into JIT> , .Aa , JIG , ex. nfcrnii , to sing ; a nlufc , a , o, I sang ; and the latter by the addition of the future tense of the auxiliary verb 6'bimb to the infinitive mood, ex. a Gy^y irfemb, I shall sing. l\j> VERBS ENDING IN -ct. Infinitive I st - per. -2 nd - per. past. 6epe4b , to preserve. 6epe-ry -Hteuib 6eperb. B.*e l ib , to draw. BJIC-KJ jK-ry MO-ry ne-Ky cinpii-ry ->Keuib cmpurb. ct-Ky -ueuib cl>Ki>. me-Ky -qeuib rneKb. v - l ieiiib to burn. MOHb , to be able. nem, to cook. cinpiiHb , to shear. to cut. - l iemb BJICKTJ. -;Keuib acerb. ->Keiub iorb. meib to flo\v. , to pound. $ 2if>, The above verbs form the third per- son plural of the present tense , by the ad- dition of Wb to the lirst person singular, ex. Gepery, Geperymfc ; Bjieny , B^eKyinij. The fe- minine and neuter genders of the past tense are formed from the masculine , by changing the final z into ia , ,10 ; ex GepeYb, Gepervia, Gepery 6. 3W. VERBS ENDING IN mb OR rnu PRECEDED BY A CONSONANT. Infinitive. 6jiK)cmir , to guard. Gpecmii , to crawl, rpecmb , to row. THecmb , to oppress rpbiciub , to gnaw. Kjiacmb, to curse. MCCIUH , to sweep, npacmb, to spin. iL/iecnni, to plait, nacnrn , to pasture. i st - per. Past. rpe6-y -euib rnem-v Mera-y l(t - per. -euib -eujb Gpejib rpe6-b. -euib -eiiib -euib -euib -euib -euib -euib nacij. pacuiu , to inpacmH , to shake. njiem-y nac-y pocm-y -euib poet, mpac-y -euib nipac*. , to blossom. i;BBin-y -euifa U,BBJITJ. $ 216. The third person plural of the pre- sent tense , and the feminine and neuter genders of the past are formed in the same manner as in the verbs ending in w. ! J Jq u C 1 j i : S = 1 IT 3 >a >s . re re "^ IIHhfi 'HBHHhG *z < re re ma H OB ii maHb. | ( o "5 < t "3 E E E E y y 2 A n a; 5 - A B I i re E S I' H z | o" >, I. I "^ !t cr 2 re a O A E >-, M o >, 1 ^ cc 5* r 5* 5- o a; 2 ^ 'C ^ ^ o o 1 < ^ "^ o* = >-> re O E y ^ kj y Q t ? s H tj I y O CO iO .0 "=> "5 1 i -1 4 q.rBhGH 'BIIIIhGH trim -, se >-. O >> u '0 C s . s 1 rQ a -s s ^ - o -^ **- < ^ -5 IS B 43 5 H U w H S ea pa ^ Q ^ CO 'O CO ^ >~ (33 & >-, > ^ ^ O >~> >-> B CO CO 5^1^ J: s co < 4Q 49 O 3 co <0 p ea S B 2 s 5 4=! 45 S CO CO S 05 S c j: c a. 10 4; c 51 ED 5 s s ^ 3 s CO ^ j$ C5 _: ~ | I < CO f/j a; 3 PQ fQ W I "i 3 g B o t- D O 3 A a k> E s E I I C5 E s E - s ^ o 3 o 5 *, S o S P >~s 1 ^J 3 >-) >-> ^ >* >^> * >> - >-, -^ [V (^ K^f ^ ^ *^ ^< -q & rt* u ^ ^s ^~~~ ^^ ca ^"> >^> 5Q J^ >- o '" '- o O 'O '0 '0 W 'O o' 3 jj ^ r tQ ,, * NB Q 1 s 9J BCJlTi ; S A CO CO O 3J i s -= s 3 O 05 O C5 B K ca O -a ca c^ u u G 8 s resent >, S? S CO | E g 2 05 B 2 B e, b O ^ ts 2 2 ji Q> L HP > S^ s_ , >a ^^ O X- ^v ^ E 1 a , Be cm ii , [. CBecmH , iju3ii mi> , , Beamw , F CBe3inH, , Btiiiamb, . BtCHITlb j f. CBtCHm . ro n a nib, . rHatnb , E a F o c v Q -* - a> G 1 1 - A! . ja ' S '5 ^ 5 5 S E ' a- a. ^ y y O -P * 5 y * -j K 2 - I s E ro co o o y E E OS -3 E E "S S sr 5' ?* ^ ^5 ,-> >Tl O K^. ^ o o c o to A A II a. a. o s s g s a: E y y R 3 O. = P X ^Q JQ S O 1^ IT S 1 C3 43 B ^ o y 4 j 5 E I 1 B S _. . & a e *? re CO s fO ro S re _; re '^. ^ = 1 5 ^ G s O G a G G O r re u 1 re rw O O G re E 2 G c o a A E 05 re 3 G J3 E S S >-. CO .3 E re en G 3 E CO O ro 4 'ri re i re macKamb i 03 ^ S ^-~ ^. S ^^^ ^_^ 0- ^_ ^-^ MQ !.>-* ^-^ -. ~~" *t* G 5* Kt O jC a $^ y 9 *^t ^ ^. ^i ^^ **"* O ^^ G ^. ^. o ^^5 *^ * * - to G to '-O G '0 s rO ,0 ,c ^ >> . rO re ,a -^ 2 ^ 3 "? re s A ro S 5 re s i o i G re ^ ^ |2 g C G O G G c u re 2 o G E E 5 e >C 9 S 2 ^ ^-^ re ^~* 2 re ~^ Vj .CQ CO ^ re ^^ a <-* 1 re s G A O G O G re o re fj o .re re E J f c rt f C te & ^3 /^* O J^\- *^N /-* o X- ^\ /^ 2 .^. ^^, /^ c *S^*~. S Q re pa re PS G 3 ^ G E ; C c E CO -o s G co G K C 5 caJKamb , ^ c E re -E o macKlunb , m a mil in b , rinaiiinmb , | 5 js c Q ~ V c V S ^ ( 221 ) $ 217. The definite branch corresponds to the prefix in English of the different tenses of the auxiliary verb to be to the gerund of the principal verb, ex. OHT> Be4,enn> Jiouja4b BT> KO- HiouiHK) , he is leading the horse to the stable. $218. The verbs xoAHinb, to go, *3Anmb, to ride and Kjuiarnb, to eat, have also the definite branch : HAinn , to be going; txarnb , to be riding, and fccinb , to be eating; which being too irregular to be inserted in the preceding table, the lull conjugation of the definite and perfect branches is here subjoined. Conjugation of the verb HAIIIII , to be going. DEFINITE BRANCH. Infinitive mood , MAMJH , to be going. INDICATIVE MOOD. P r e s e n t. Sing. fl n AJ , I am going. niw ffAeuib, thou art going. out, OHH, OHO H^em-h, he, she, it is going. P I u. MM HAewb , we are going. BW HAeme , you are going. OHH , OH* H4ymi> , they are going. Past. S i n g. a niejiij, imia, mjio, I was going. HIM jjiejit, nijia, uijio, thou wast going. ( 222 ) OH-b iuej*b , he was going, ona uiASi , she was going. OHO UJ.AO, it was going. P I it. MM wail , we were going. 'Bbi LUJIH , you were going. OHM, OH* IUJIM, they were going. Future. Sing, n 6y,ay U4,rnH , I shall be going. mbi 6y/3,emb H^HIH , thou will be goinrr. OH-b,oHa,oHo 6yAenib HAmH,he,she,ilwiin : going. P f u. MW Gy^ewb n^niH , we shall be going. Bbi 6y4,eme iiAmk , you will be going. OHM, out GyAynrb HAmij, they will be going. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 5 i n g. MAH , go (thou). uycmb OHTJ, ona ; OHO iiAemij, let him, her, it go. P I u. JMHme , go (ye). uycrab OHH , OH* 11/a.ymTj, let them go. Participle. Pres. HAymin, aa, ee, who or which is going. Past, me^iniii, aa, ee, who or which was going. Gerund. Pres. n^a or HAVIM , going. Past. lue^ujii , having gone. V ( *** ) PERFECT BRANCH. Infinitive mood, noumu , to go. Past. S i n g. n, noiiieji-b , noiujia , nouuo , I went. mbi nomejiT, , nouuia , nouuo , thou wentest. OHTJ noujejiTi, he went. oHa nouua , she went. OHO nouijio , it went. P / u. Mbi nom^H , we went. EH nouuiH , you went. OHM , oHt nouuiH , they went. Future. Sing. H noii/iy,, I shall go. nifai noiiAeuib 9 thou wilt go. OHT> , OHa , OHO noftaenrb , he , she , it will go. P I u. Mbi iroH^eMTj , we shall go. Bbi no&Aeme f y OU w iU g Oi OHII , out noH^ynrb , they will go* IMPERATIVE MOOD. t go ("thou). nycmi, oH^ona^Ho noHAemtetmer, t go, P I u. , let us go. , go ^ye). nycmi, OHM, OH* noH^ymi>, let them go. P a r 1 1 c i p I e. Past. nome^mJM , aa , ee , gone. Gerund. Past. nome.4uiH , having gone. Conjugation of the verb fcxamb , to be riding. DEFINITE BRANCH. Infinitive mood, txainb , to be riding. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. S i n g. a i/iy , I am riding* HIM t^enih , tbou art riding. OHT> , ona, OHO IMenrb , he , she , it is riding. P / u. ibi *Aeivn> , we are riding. BW t/i,eme , you are riding. OHH , oHt tAyim> , they are riding. Past. S i n g. si txa^i> , a, o, I was riding, mm ixajTb , a, o, thou wast riding. OHTJ -fexajiij , he was riding. oiia ixajia , she was riding. OHO txa^io , it was riding. P I u. MM *xajm , we were riding. Bbi txa^iH , you were riding. t OHII , OH* txajiii ; they were riding. \ C Future. a 6y&y *xamb , I shal] be riding. mw GyAeuib "fcxanib , thou wilt be riding, OH-bl fhe ^ ona >6yAenn> txamb , ./she vwill be riding. OHO* (it J P / u. MBI 6v4ei\n> "fexarnb , we shall be riding. BW Gy^erne "fexamb , you will be riding. OHM, oirfe 6y4yim> ixamb , they will be riding. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. JOHI> rinV oHa vi^emij , let Jher/ride. rhinV} Jher/ri (it 3 nycrab OHH , OH* ^Aynr-b , let them ride. Participle. Pres. *4yii;iH, an, ee, who or which is riding. Past. ixaBiuiH, an, ee, who or which was riding. Gerund. Pres. *Ayqw , riding. Past. txaBUJif f having been riding. PERFECT BRANCH, Infinitive mood , noixamb , to ride. INDICATIVE MOOD, P a s L S i n g. x noixaji-b , a , o , I rode. a o thou rodest. ( 226 ) notxa^-b , he rode, ona notxajia , she rode. OHO noixajio , it rode. P I u. Mbi no-Exajui , we rode. Bbi notxa^w , you rode. OHH , OH* noixajiH , they rode. Future. Sing, a no-EAy , I shall ride. not^euib , thou wilt ride. , OHR, OHO notAemb, he, she, it will rid P I u. aibi no*AeMb , we shall ride. Bbi notAeme , you will ride. OHH, OH* notAynrb , they will ride. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. , ride (thou). TOHTA rhirrri b no"fcA enIlj , let ride. (OHO) (it 3 P I u. ride (yej. nycmb OHH, OH* no*Ayim>, let them ride. P a r t i c i p I e. Past. notxaBuiiH , aa , ee , who or whieh rode. Gerund. Past. notxaBuiii , having ridden. Conjugation of the verb tcmb, to be eating* DEFINITE BRANCH. Infinitive mood, tcmi> , to be eating. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Sing. H tMij , I am eating. mm tiub , thou art eating. OH* , ona, OHO tcnrb , he, she, it is eating. P I u. MM tAHMT> , we are eating. BW t^iiine , you are eating. OHH , OH*, t^flm-b , they are eating. Past. Sing. & B-JITJ , t^a , ik/io , I was eating. HIM tjit , i^ia , tjio , thou wast eating. OHTJ tjiij , he was eating. OHa *jia , she was eating. OHO ijio , it was eating. P I u. MW t^iH , we were eating. BW 'km , you were eating. OHH , OH* *JIH , they were eating. Future. Sing. n Gy^y tcmb, I shall be eating, mw Gy^euih tcmb , thou wilt be eating. OHTJ, ona, OHO Gy^enrb tcnib, he, she, it will be eating. P I u. tcmb , we shall be eating. EH 6y4,eme tcnib , you will he eating. OHH, out, 6yAymi tcmb , they will he eating. IMPERATIVE MOOD. S i n -. tnib , eat (thouj* nycmb OHI>, ona,oHo -fecnrb, let him, her, it eat. P I u. tuibme , eat (ye). nycrnb OHM, OH* t^Him* , let them eat. Participl e. Pres. tAHii^iu, aa, ee, who or which is eating. Past. tBiuifi, an, ee, who or which was eating. Gerund. Pres. tAa , eating. Past. teiiiH , having eaten. PERFECT BRANCH. Infinitive mood , ebtcmb , to eat up. INDICATIVE MOOD- Past. Sing. s cbtjrb , ct>*jta , ei>tjio , I ate up. mw ci*^'b, CT>liJia> c-bijio, thou atest 5ce. OHI eT3'l3^T> ^ he ate. ona ciiijta , she ate* OHO cttjio . it ate. P I u. , we ate. , you ate. OHH , OHE Cbtjiii , they ate. future. Sing. a c-btw-b , I shall eat &c. raw crbtiiib , thou wilt eat. OHT> , OHa , OHO cttcnrb , he, she, it will eat. P I u. Mbi cit/jHM-b , we shall eat. BLI c^tAHUie , you will eat. OHM, OH* cb-fc^amT,, they will eat. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. cttiiib, eat (thou) &c. nycniixOHi,,oHa,oHo cttcrm,, let him, her, it eat, P I u. Cb-fcnjbme , eat (ye). nycmi, OHH , OH* 01*4 Aim, , let them eat, Participl e. Past. cttBiuifi , aa , ee , who or which ate &c. Gerund. Pres. CTjtBuiH , having eaten &c. THEME XXVII. ON IRREGULAR VERBS. In countries where there is no wood they burn coal , turf iind even straw. Oak - wood is employed (goes] in the building of ships. The grape vine cannot grow in cold climates. Many Nomadian tribes inhabit (live in) Siberia. The hawk soars above the clouds. People make (plait} baskets of willow branches. Small offences lead where there is no wood, 6e3JTBCHblil. country , cmpaea. to burn , JKC I IL. coal , KaMCHHoe yrojite. turf, myp(})Tj. even straw , Oak- WOod ? Ay66BbIHJl'feC'b. to go, ufl.mii. in, na, gov. the ace. the building, empoeHie. a ship, K0pa6jb, V. 4' grape , BiiHorpaAHbm. vine , josa. to be able , Mozb. to grow , pacinn. cold , climate , in , BT>. Siberia , Cn6iipi>. tO live , JKHTJJb. the hawk, acmpefrb. to soar, enmbcn. above , Ha^-b. a cloud , 66^aKO. a basket , Kopskna. to plait , n^iecmb. of, H3T>, gov. the gen. willow , HBOBblH. branch , small , offence, up oc my iron*. to lead , eecmii. ejreat crime , npecmynjie- nie. Socrates , CoKpanrb. to fall , nacmb. a victim , HcepmBa. to , to be rendered by the gen. case. calumny , K^eBema. malice , 3Ji66a. fellow-citizen , corpa- to great crimes. Socrates fell a victim to the calumny and malice of his fellow-citizens Yasco de Gama discovered the passage by sea to the East - Indies (Eastern indiaj Mon- golfier invented air balloons. Linaeus acquir- ed great fame by reducing (having reduced) natural history to a system. Peter the Great established the first Russian fleet. Where thou Mongolfier , to invent, air, BO3AyinHbiH. a balloon , iiiap-b. Linaeus , ^ftiHeii. to acquire, npioGptcniH. fame , cjiana. by having, mfcM-b qmo. to reduce , npneecmu* natural , ecmecmBeH- HblM. history , ncmopiH. a system, cncmeivia. Peter the Great, Ilenrpb Yasco de Gama, BacKo ^e Faivia. to discover, Hauran. by sea, MopcKoS. the passage , nymb. to , BTJ , gov. the ace. Eastern , Bocin6 i Ubiii. India , to establish , saeccmu* Russian , fleet, cJ)Jioimj. where, r/^t. hast not sown (there) thou wilt not reap. Come and take them, said Leonidas to the king of Per- sia who demanded , that the Spartans should deliver up their arms. to sow, ctHirib. King, U[apb. to reap, noxcdmb. Persian, flepcH4,CKiH. to come , .npinmn. to demand, mpeGoBanib. to take, 63HT7Jb. a Spartan, CnapmaHeirb. to say , oniF/feqamb. to deliver up , Leonidas, ./leoHH/vb. their arms, SECT. X [R.EMARKS ON THE TJSE OF THE TENSES AND MOODS. i. Tenses. 219. In general the present tense Russ answers to the present tense English. 220. The present tense is sometimes used instead of the past in Russ , as well as in. English , especially in narration , ex. HaKOHeiyb Hacmynd- At length the dismal em'b cmpauiHaa HO I IJ> ; night comes on ; black ne6o noKpbiedemcfi -qep- clouds cover the sky, n raw- and a death - like si- ( 2 33 ) civiep- ience reigns through mil oG-beMAenrb Bcionpn- all nature. 221. In some instances the present tense is used instead of the future in both langua- ges ; as, Onaqpe3T> wfccairb om- She sets out on her nyrneme- travels in a month. cm BOH a in h. H aaBiiipe ofrijaro AO- I dine at home to- wa. morrow. 222. The past tense English preceded by the conjunction if or wliether is rendered in Russ by the present tense; as, OUT* cnpocHJiii MCHH, He asked me , if I nuwy Jin n nticbvio. was writing a letter. Ofib xonrfe.nj anarnh, He wished to know, eoeopw JIH n no , Kor^a OHT> 1 was writing y when he entered. o Baci> B^e- ] was thinking of you pa, Kor^a u nojiyiHJit yesterday, when 1 re- Baujy saniiCKy. ceived your note. 224. The past perfect corresponds to both the perfect and pluperfect English. When the action is of recent occurrence , it may be ren- dered by the former, and when of more remote occurrence and correlative, by the latter; as, H Hannccuii imchMO. I have written the letter. Bw MR* cKaaajin, *irao You told me that OHTJ yjKe npoiiimd-i'b he had read the book KHnry , a om euje in- through, and he was majiij ee , Kor^a a. BO- reading it, when I went uue>b. in. 29.5. The past tense of the iterative , in ad- dition to its signification of repetition , marks the remoteness of the action, and may be rendered in English by used (o with the infinitive of the principal verb; as, zoeapneaji-b : Solon used to say: cawaro ceGA ! know thyself! qacmo KTJ uewy xa- I used often to visit him. 226. The past tense of the semelfactive cannot be expressed by any particular tense in English without the aid of an adverb. Bo.AHa nJiecHJJia na The wave broke fsud- najiyGy. denly) on the deck. PflAbi coMKHyjiHCb n The ranks closed fat BOHCKO ^BkHyjioch. once) and the army mo- ved ^suddenly), 227. The future tenses of the indefinite, perfect and semelfaetive branches are rendered in English by the first future. Bb AepeBHt H 6y4y In the country I shall qacmo tSAHmb eepxoMi,. often ride on horseback. Saumpe H notAy aa To morrow I shall ropOAb. ride out of town. OHT, Hwqero ne mpo- He will not touch any Henrb. thing. 228. The Russian gerund present is rendered by the participle active English with the addi- tion of in; as. epenpae^A/icb In crossing the river, ptKy ? oiipoKHuy- the boat was upset. jiacb. n FoiwepaH BOC- //? reading- Homer I KpacomoKjeio am transported at the emu \OBI>. beauty ot his poetry. 229. The gerund past is rendered in En- glish by the gerund present of (he auxiliary verb to have, con net-ted with the participle past of the principal verb ; as , CnA6wncb Cb fiKop.q , Having wefgbed an- MM nycmiuiicb BT> Mope, chor we put out to sea. 280. The auxiliary verb GbiJio added to the past of the definite branch corresponds to the English pluperfect; as. -fl cAt~iaJ,T> GbiJio oiuiiG- I had made a mis- KV , Aa ycut^iii ee no- take , but corrected it jipaBirrnb. in lime. 281. The same \erb with the past tense of tbe verb xomimb and the infinitive of the principal verb corresponds to the English was going ; as , H xomivi'b 6i,uio e^it- 1 was going to ride^ xamb , HO GbiJit VA^p- but was prevented by ^am> AypnoK) noro^oio. the bad weather. 282. The auxiliary verb 6bied,io added to tbe past tense of a verb, corresponds to the English used to followed by the infinitive; as , .fl GbiBajio Girajii) no I used to run about jiyraarb. the meadows. n Gbinajio xaHUiBayiT, I used to walk thirty no in p ii A na rail Be p era* versls a day. . Prefixed to the present tense it ex- presses the same idea in a more lively mauner. BT> uiKO.it, MM 6bioa- At school we used to jio ymiMca, a oin> 11- study, while he was rpaernk. playing- 2. Moods. $ 233. The infimtive is used in the Russian language without any preposition or sign; as, H mcASLto snanjb. I wish to know. yincb eoeopiimb npa- Learn to speak cor- BHJibno. reetly. a3 1. When the infinitive Russ is preceded by the conjunction qrnoGbi or 4a6w it expresses the end of the action ,* as , KopoQio 3namb It is necessary to read MHOPO and write much to know unrnanib H nucainb. a lanofuao-e well. O o $ 235. The infinitive is frequently employed instead of the imperative; as, no npii- Let this he executed according to die order. D no ceMy. So bu it. ^36. The infinitive is sometimes followed by tlie interrogative particle AH. \ in which case it expresses douhl ; as, Biuamh-jiii MH1> eiu,e Shall I see my native past MOIO pOAiitiy? place once more? When preceded by He it marks the cer- tainty of the non-occurrence ot an action; as, He BMAarnb rnefi* 60- Thou wilt never see *1>e rnBoeii pOAHHbi. thy native place more. 287. In addition to the manner of for- ming the imperative shewn in the conjugation it may be expressed by the prefix of the particle Aa ; in which form it corresponds to the optative English. <4a coxpaHHrnij Baci May God preserve Bort. you. 4,a McnojiHHincfl ea- May your desire be uie HtejiaHie. gratined. /^a Gy^emi* BOJIH Let thy will be done. 288. There is neither conditional nor subjunctive mood in the Russian language ; the former is expressed by the addition of the particle 6w or ec^H 6w to the past indi- Ee3"b ApyacGhi if Jiro6- Without love and t cBiiinn fibi fb 6u ne- friendship the woild ,CiUbiHeK). would be a dismal wil- dei ness. H 6bMi> 60- If 1 were rich Sec. 289. The subjunctive is expressed in the Rus- sian language by the parficles MmoGu, 4,a6bi , or \orna 6w , added to the past tense of the indicative; as, OHT, rnj)e6yemT,,qmo- He requires that I 6w a c/b ini.Mb no*- should go with him. HarcaabiBa- Children are punish- OHH HC- ed , that they may re- form. , s i*CS V ' 7! u * _3 - 1 = ** - s = g s 3 fi o n CQ ^ M S S I E PB ?C 2 , ^3 i~^_ - ^^ ^__ y u ^* ^ ^^^ o ** '"j^- ^ Si ^*^ W ii ? ? 2 S * 5 f B JQ *^ ta ! a. ^ ; * - ! t<5 V Jp (S ^ ,^ KJ 3 5 S g ^ 4) s ^ ^. a, 5 I I E a, S ^ R R H X J 9 2 t> i A \ . C C it g o J w 45 H d _. = if * O; _* * (5 H A fa ^t ^ . " ^ 3 " S 3 a, | i 3 H pa S a 1 1 .2 l-l A ^ IH C c < *j _ > ^l^ ri __, ' . u t 3 iC f ill *5 <- >- >s * (0^*0 o _q w ai 5 B S w 3 " w 4> 3 as * j ' ^s OJ tT -3 *< ^ "* r5 fc s C =3 5 ,T ^ ^ *s> fi - S s V fa si T _J^_^. I 5 S f 3 a | w J *> 5 = a .2 pa s Ji >, S 5 1 Sslsl 5 S o; | ^^ V ~u a H 0> X f ! a ff ?^7 |l S t f ? ! i c i E J 2 T' ~ Xt.iy 'l Jll ld .s d ? 7 _^ : l/Uf Mrti/i i^ipuj "/ u f jivj -J^ -~ ; PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE. Ow THE CONJUGATION OF VS*BS, Howard ' s tomb. If I tell you , that at the very entrance of the town of Sympheropol , on the high road from Nicolaeff, there stands a monument to Howard , you will think that / contradict mr- self in an unpardonable manner but you will be mistaken, the monument is actually there, if, ecjiir. to tell at, y, gov. the' gen the very, entrance , of the town , BI> ropo/vb. of Sympheropol , CIIM- on , no , gov. the dat. high , GO.ILUIOH. road , Aopora. from , ornii. INicolaeff, HnKo^aeB-b. there , not expressed. to stand , cmonmb. a monument, naMJim- HMK1>. to, expressed, by the gen. Howard , to think , to contradict, npomn- in, expressed by the ins. case. unpardonable , nenpo- manner but , ii. to be mistaken , own actually , HO there , to be , high granite obelisk, the pedestal of which forms a sarcophagus with the following inscrip- tion: Howard departed this life at the age of sixty five years, 1790. It is sarrounded by a circular stone wall with gates of iron railing opposite the inscription. This is all verv well ; thanks to him who first conceived the idea of honour- ing the memory of a man worthy of universal high, BblCOKlH. granite , obelisk, o6ejiHCKT>. the pedestal , c m a jib. to form , cocmasjiAmb. a sarcophagus , cap- Koc|)arb. with, CT>, gov. the gen. to follow , inscription , to depart this life, CKOH- at the age of 65 , na 65 OM * ro^y omi pont- Aenia csoero. to surround , o6no- cumb. circular , stone, wall, orpa^a railing, wide, imipoKiii. gates, Bopoma. opposite , Hacynpo- all this , Bee BUIO. is very well, mairb. thanks , 11 xeajia. to conceive an idea , 3axomtmb. to honour, nozmnmb. the memory na- Marnb. worthy, universal , esteem; but it is a monument, a cenotaph, and not the tomb of Howard. The ashes of this bene- factor of the wretched lie about three versts from the town, where I saw a miserable mouldering' brick pyramid, instead of the sun-dial, which/ hoped to have found over his grave according to his last request. This circumstance may be per- haps unknown to you. In the year 1790, when a esteem , but, HO. it is, 9rno. a cenotaph, KeHoma(f)T>. and not, a He. the tomb , rpoGniiaa. the ashes, npaxi> (sing.) benefactor, the wretched , cmpa/K to lie , noznednib. about, BT> , gov. the prep. three , V. i3o. a verst , Bepcma. from, oiirb. where , H ma>n> mo. to see , miserable , Gt brick, pyramid, instead , BMtcmo. the sun-dial , coji Hbie qacw. to hope , JKeJidmb. to find , nailmu. over, HR^T,, gov. the ins. according, eorviactio. last , aocj&AHiii. request, BO.I/I. circumstance , o6^crno- maybe perhaps, Mo/Keini> unknown , HeH3Btcni- HO. when , contagious putrid fever raged in the Crimea, Howard happened to be at Cherson on his way to Constantinople. You may easily imagine , that it was difficult for a man, who considered it as a sacred duty daily to visit prisons, ho- spitals and dungeons, to escape the contagion: he actually fell a sacrifice to it. Feeling that to rage , cenptncmeo- eamb. in the Crimea, BT Kpu- M y. contagious , npHJiiinqH- Bhlfl. putrid, niHjioH. lever , rop/mica. to happen , c.iyZunjbcn. to be t not expressed. at , BT> , gov. the prep. Cherson , Xepconii. on, na, gov. the prep. way , nymb. Constantinople , easily , to imagine , npe^cma- to consider, ce6t. as , BT> , gov. the ace. sacred, duty, daily, to visit you may a prson, miopi>Ma. an hospital, GojbHHqa. a dungeon, ocmport. to escape , iisfrb/Kamb. the contagion, sapaaa. actually, A^ncniBkrnejiL- HO. to fall , dijiambcx , gov. the ins. a victim, cepniBa. it, V. 1 55. to feel, his end was approaching , he called his two friends, with whom he could converse in his native language , and having bid them farewell said: / wish for no monument , and beg you only to place a simple sun-dial over my grave. But this request was forgotten, there is no sun-dial over his grave; and it is a pity, a great pity ! His friends erected a little hrick pyramid, but no\v even that simple monument is mouldering away, end , Koneirb. was approaching, 3OKT>. to call, npnsedmb Kb ceGt. a friend , npi/imejiL. to be able, Motb. V. 2l5. to speak, zoeopumb. native , npupOAHbm. language, H3biio>. to bid farewell , npo- them , CT to say , jnonument,naMamHHK'b no, HHKanoro. to wish , to beg , npovumb. to place , grave , simple , npocniLiir. sun-dial qacw. request , to forget , there is no , it is a pity, amoro H< a great pity, o to erect, a little , now , menepb. even , H. that , 3monrb. simple , npocmou. to moulder away, pas- cbinambcfl. ( 246 ) and e'er long the place will be unknown where lie the remains of this friend of suffering hu- manity.. Mouravieff. e'er long, BCKOpt. to lie, will be unknown , He the remains, oemamKir. ysnatonrb. of suffering humanity , the place , Mtcnio. CHAP. VI. PARTICIPLES. $ 240. The participle is a part of speech derived from the Verb , and combines the meaning of the relative pronoun Kino , who ; Komophift , which, or maro > 3Haioii;yio Ins. SHaiOu^HMii, 3naKMn,eK) Prep, o saaioineMT,, o 3HaKMijei P I u. Nom. 3Haioiiiie , SHaKum'a , Gen. SHaioiHiixTj , Dat. 3HaK)IAHMl, , Ace. InS. Prep, o SH THEME XXVIII. OKTTHE DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. The earth, inhabited by us is a planet, be- longing to the solar system. The ruins of an- cient Rome are monuments of its former si-eat- / s ness. A man, (ivho is) unmindful of his future des- tination, is like a traveller, who has no other end but the pleasures of the present moment. Russia is divided from America by Behring's straits , the earth , by us , HQMII. to inhabit , a planet, to belong , npnna^.ie- solar , system , cucmeMa the ruins, ancient f Rome , PHMT> a monument , f o r m e r , iepn K&. Behring , BepHHr*. strait, C ^49 ) which are about 78 versts wide. Of the rivers, which fall into the Caspian sea, the Volga is the most considerable. Among the poets, who have distinguished themselves in modern times in England, the most celebrated are Scotland Byron. Epaminondas , mortally wounded in the battle of Mantinea, said to his friends, who lamen- ted that he should die without leaving any chil- dren; I leave two daughters, the victories of Leuctra which are, rendered by the participle ofnMtmb, to have. a verst, sepcma. a river, ptKa. to fall , Caspian , the Volga , Bojra. considerable , 3Ha i iii- Epaminondas , EnaMii- among , a poet, cmnxomBopeiTb. to distinguish , npocjid- modern , time, Bpewa England , Scott, Byron , mortally , CMepme.iLHQ. to wound , pdmtmb. the battle , cpajKenie. Mantinea, to say , a friend, 4pyn>. to lament , eamb. that he should die , o moMij qrao yMMpafl. without leaving, ne oc- a child , to leave , daughter , the victory Leuctra, 1106*43 and Mantinea. Ignorance united with modesty is more bearable than knowledge accompanied by haughtiness. A perturbed mind , like a trou- led sea, reflects all the objects, which surround it, distorted and broken, communicating to them that disordered motion, by which it is itself agitated. It is necessary for man , who is hourly tempest-tost on the sea of life , to have faith ignorance,HeBl>}Kecn]BO. to unite , coe^nnArnb, with , CT>. modesty, CKpoMHocnn,. bearable , CHQCIIWH. knowledge , SHaeie. to accompany , conpo- haughtiness , cnecb. to perturb , ecmpeeo mind , like, 110466110. to trouble, the sea , Mope to reflect, all ^ see* to surround, an object, to distort , o6e3o6pd- to break , to communcate , co- that, disordered motion,Bo.i- neine. to agitate , ofypeedmb. for, ex pressed by the dat. hourly , ejKeiacHO. sea , Mope. life , 5KH3Hb. to tempest-toss , o6ype- it is necessary , neo6- to have > faith , B* in Providence for his pilot. The first step beyond the cottage presented me with the most enchanting view. The rays of the rising sun, intercepted by a range of rocky hills , shot their enlivening light through the rugged openings ; the valley partly illumined, and partly hid in shade , exhibited the most varied display of colours. The Tartar village with its huts , sending forth their white clouds of n , Bi). Providence , ne. step , niarb. beyond , sa. the threshold , noporb. cottage , xiiiKHHa. to present, Aocmapnmi,. enchanting, BOCXHIIIH- a ray , to rise , to intercept , ncpexed- rocky , Ka a hill , ropa. to shoot > Opocarab. through , CKBO3L rugged opening, to enliven, light , the valley , partly , qacmiio. to illumine, ocetiijdmb to hide shade , to exhibit, varied display, iirpa. colour , HBtrm. Tartar, Tamapcidw. a village , ^epeBHH. hut, 4.OMMKTJ. to send forth, nycKamb white , Gt.iwif. column } OOASLKQ. ( ,52 3 curling smoke through the dark foliage of the trees, was seated like the ruling genius of the mountain scene, which served as its crown; amidst the groves which girded it as with a luxuriant garland; and on the shore of the great deep, which brought to its feet the trihute of its waves. tO CUrl , OHTTJbC/l, smoke , ^bi>n>. dark, rycmbiii, foliage , a tree , was seated, like , Kaio. the ruling genius , ija- of the mountain scene, MCJKAV ropi. to serve , as its , en. a crown , amidst , a grove , pouja. to gird, npenoficbieamb, as , BT 66pa3li. luxuriant, pocKomHwn. a garland, rapjiiiw^a. shore , 6epen>. the great deep, Mope, to bring, npniiocunib. foot , Hora. trihute , a wave , CHAP. VII. ADVERBS. $ a4 2 The adverb is commonly prefixed to the verb to express some qualifying circum- stance of the action as , roBopiimb enAmHo , to speak distinctly. nocmynamL 6Aazopa3JMno , to act prudently. $ 243. The only variations, which adverbs are subject to, are the degrees of signification * which are formed by changing the termination o into te for the comparative, and by prefixing npe , oqeHb , or uecbivia to the positive for the superlative degree; as, 6bicmpo , rapidly. Gbicmpie, more rapidly. MHoro, much , npewHoro, very much. paHo, early, oicHb pano, very early. ycniiiiHO, success- sechivta yc- very success- sully. niuiHo. i . Adverbs of place , in answer to the question r^t ? where ? 34*cfc , here. r#fc Hn6y4i> , any- where, ma\i b , there. BC34* J ! >everywhere. , here. noBCH)4y{ mymi, * There are however diminutive adverbs, which are formed in the same manner as diminutive adjectives ; MaaoBaiuo, ralher little j paueubKo., pretty early etc. , somewhere. KpyroMi> , around. BOKpyrb, about. BHyrnpii , inside. cnapyjKH , outside. BT> nepe^k , before. iiasa^H , behind. Ha Bepxy , above. Bii Busy, below, BT> npaeo, on the right. BT> aifio , on the left. nocpeAH, in the middle. 6.AM3KO, near. o , far. H , at a distance. H , near, at hand. 2. Adverbs of movement , in answer to the ques- tions KV^a ? whither ornKy,a,a ? whence. &c. , hither. my4,a , thither. Ky^a HiiGyA^ , some- where. npflivio, straight forward. , on one side. 9 along, iioneperij , across. BBepxi>, up. BHH3TJ , down. Biiympb , into. Haaa^ii , behind. , before. , distantly, away. omcio^a , hence. ommy4.a, thence. HSBHympH, from out. H3BHt , from without, cii Bepxy , from above. ci> HH3y, from below. CT>nepe,4H, from before. , from behind. JIT, from far. ns6jitf 3H , from near. . ci> jitea , from the left. ei>npaBa, from the right. omoBcio^y , from all sides, npoib t away. mor^a , then, menepb , now. HbiHt, at present, ceiiqaci , this minute. >, immediately, sometimes, a , always. 3. Adverbs of time , in answer to the question ? when ? 116340 , late. AOjiro , long, ysce , already. omHbiHt, henceforth. , henceforward. , to day. saBrapa, tomorrow. B'lepa , yesterday. mnemijHro AHH , the day A / J before yesterday. aaBrapa , the day after tomorrow. , annually. , daily. nocnrieneHHo, gradually. HcnoAOBOJib , by and bv. j j ta , until. \h, in the midst. , never. seldom. iacmo , often. /jaBHo , long ago. ne ^aBHo , lately. , eternally. , long since. , before. UOCJIB . after. nomoMi> , then, pano , early. 4- Adverbs marking the order of time. BO nepBbix-b, in the first place. BO Bmopwx-b , in the se- cond place, caaiajia, from the be- ginning. cnepBa , at first. npeiKAe , before. iromoMD , afterward, sa CHMIJ a after this. no aiajiv, little by little. ( 256 ) , farther. cHoua ,} HaKoHeiji>, at last. BHOBI, ,>again. Hanoc^t^oKij, at length, onarnb,} 5. Adverbs of repetition , in answer to the que-. tion CKo^ibKo pa 3i) ? past, so many HtCKo^bKo pas* , seve- times. ral times. H , ~\ MHorOKpamHo , frequ- Abi , >once. ently. mHoJ qacrno , often. qacrno , often. , twice , cmo past , a hundred times. 6. Adverbs of quantity, in answer to the question ? how much? , so much. ^oBojibHo , enough. Mnoro , much, ^ocmainoiHo^sufiicient- Majio , little. ly. HtcKo.ii.Ko, some. C^HUIKOMT t too much. 7. Adverbs of affirmation. 4,a , yes. KOHCIHO , certainly. maKi> , so. Btpno , faithfully. , exactly. ^tHcraBHine^LHo , actu- Mb , surely. ally. , indeed. 6e3i coMiiiaiff, without doubt. npaeo , truly. na Btpiioe , for cer- BJ> CUMOMT* #fcjrfc, in fact. tain. 8. Adverbs of negation. ne , not. ornHKW,l Jnot at all. , no , HHKaKTi, J not in the HH'iero , nothing, least 9. Adverbs of doubt. \ jiw , scarcely. Mo/KenrbGbinib, perhaps. , perchance. MOJKemij cmarnr>cH, maybe. 10. Adverbs of augmentation and excess. ropa34O , much. c^i HID KOMT> , too much. oqenb , \ qpesBwiafifio . uncom- , >very. ecbMa,J mealy. Kpaiine , 7 coBctM-b . entirely. >excessivly. iHe,^ BOBce ; allogelher. 1 1 . Adverb* of comparison. KaKb, so. paBHo , equally. JKC K3Ki> , as. no/j,66Ho , like. 6bi,J nnaqe , otherwise. 6yAnro , | mo'iHo , exactly, 12. Adverbs of explanation. mo e cm b , that is, HMCHHO , namely. ( 258 ) 1 3. Adverbs of quality in answer to the question Kam>? how? mam*, so. oGbiKHOBCHHo , com- maKHMii oGpasoMij , in nionly. such a manner. o\6nmo , willingly, xopomo , well. AokpoBo^bHo > volun- j'4<> , hadly. tanly. , tolerably. Haciubiio , forceahly. , indifferently. napoMHo , purposly. n Cflifb , so-so. Jiiiiio , evidently. >, pretty well, jierno , easily. , mid- y4,66Ho , conveniently. Imgly. /napoMii , gratis. , all at once. maiino , secretly. , suddenly. nnu,emHo , fruitlessly onpoivieinqHBo , lashly. &c. i4 Adverbs of interrogation. r^t , where. CKOjibKO , how many. Ky^a , whither. CKOJbKO pas-b , how whence. many times. , how far. KaKi , how, a , when. KaKHMit o6pasoMb in till when. what way. , how long, no^mo , why. KaKi qacrao, how often. 3ai*MT> ; for what. THEME XXIX. ON ADVERBS. The people are happy there, where industry is combined with good morals. We see every- where traces of the wisdom of the Creator. Magellan performed the first voyage round the world. There is no where such a dense po- pulation as in China. In Egypt, where formerly the sciences flourished, ignorance now reigns. Anger often causes us to act rashly. As we ap- are happy , 6jaro,i.cH- cniByeini*. industry, mpyAO-AtoGie. to combine , coe^w- Hanib. morals , HpaBu. to see , a trace , wisdom , npeMVApocrnb. of the Creator, BoHcieia. Magellan , Marejijiairb. to perform, coBepuiHinb. voyage , nyraemecrnBie. round , KpyroMT> , gov. the gen. the world, there is , Htnrb. such , maKOH. a dense population China, Rmnaji. Egypt , Eriiiiem-b. a science , nayna to flourish , to reign , ijapcniBo- anger , to cause , to act, 4,1jHcnTBOBamb. as we approach, npn proach the land we discover y?/\tf the summits of the mountains, then the tops of towers, and at last the shore itself. A grateful man remem- bers eternally a benefit once conferred upon him. To speak much and reflect little is a sign of frivolity. We do not know for certain how far the Phenicians extended their navigation. -/ O There is no rule without exception. In some arts we can scarcely be compared with the an- cients. A gentle spirit, like a smooth lake , land , 6epen>. to discover (to observe.^ summit , BepmiiHa. a mountain, ropa. tops , sepxk. a tower, 6am HA. the shore , 6epen. a grateful man , 6jia- to remember , HOM- to confer, OKasanib. a benefit , ycjyra. a sign , npii3HaKT. frivolity, j!erKo>ibic.Aie, to know , a Phenician , . the ancients, gentle , CHOKOHHWH. spirit smooth , lake , osepo. C =6' ) reflects every object in its just proportions. The Lacedaemonians, accustomed their child- ren from their very infancy to speak briefly and distinctly. It is easier to govern the passions than to conquer them. People for- give malice sooner than contempt. Many peo- ple write better than they speak , and others speak better than they write. Sooner, said Pyrrhus , will the sun swerve from its course , to reflect, ompaaianib. object , n BT>. just, proportion , a Lacedaemonian from , CTJ. very caivibi. infancy, to accustom, npiyqamb. a child, AHinH V. $ 5i. to speak, roBopiimb. briefly, KparnKo. distinctly , HCHO. to govern, passion , cinpacnii>. to conquer , /i,arn&. people , ^H)Aif. soon , cicopo. to forgive , npoiqainb malice , 3.1 66a. than , nexcejiti. contempt , npeaptnie. many , MHorie. to write , nncamb. to speak, roBopiirni,. to say , Pyrrhus , will swerve , coupa- mkmc/i. from , ci>. course, nymb, V, 4- ( 262 ) than Fabricius from the path of virtue. Leav- ing our own country (Russia; at the comim'iice- nient of autumn , in a few da\s we passed to the south ol England , where delightful weather $//'// lingered; and when even there the- rains and fogs commenced , and the vegeta- tive force of ftature began to decay , in the stormy month of December we passed over its , CBofr. Fabricius path, cmeaa. to leave, ocmaBHnib. our own country, ome- qechiBO. Russia Poccia. at,npH, gov. the prep, commencement , iia- cmviueHie. autumn , oceub. in , Bij. a few , day , to pass , nepeiimij. to , Bb , gov. the SOUtll , H)>hHblU England , Anraifl. ace. delightful, HpeicpacHbiic. weather, noro^a. to linger, npo^oji^arnb- cn. even , u. to commence , ran fog , my ma ni>. vegetative, pacinHme.il.- HblH. force , rnJia. to decay , MeptnEtrafc. stormy , 6ypHbiu. month of December , to pass over, nepeno CHOJbCH to the still warmer climate of the south of Europe. There tlie most delightful summer again met us. All eieatiou was full of life , every- thing blossomed , every thing was clothed in green , and thousands of insects murmured in. the air. to , BT> , gov. the ace. full , still warmer , HcapKiii. life , HUISHL. climate, Kjumanrb. to blossom, qBtcnrn. Europe , Enpona. was clothed , OA*rno. delightful, npCKpacHbiH. green , summer, jrfefno. an insect, to meet, Bcinptimirnb. to murmur, creation, mBopeaie. the air, CHAP. VIII. PREPOSITION $ a44- Prepositions serve to point out the relation, in which objects stand to each other, as, KHiira Jiex.hmit na cmojii, the book lies on the table. Kpacoma 6e3T npianiHocmtf , beauty without grace &c. The following is a list of the prepositions alphabetically arranged. * 6esi> , without. , from. or 6jiii3KO, near. KpoMt, besides. , along. BMfccmo , instead. BHympn , inside. BHfc , outside. Boa.vfe , near. BOKpyrb, around. BT or BO , in. AJIH , for. ^o , until, before. 3a , after. HI. or KO , to. MerKAY , between. WIIMO, near by. na , on, above. opposite, OKO.AO , about. oKpecra'b , around, onpimb , besides. , from. * For the different cases, which they govern see Syntax, Cl.ap. II. Sect. VI. ( 2 65 ) no , according , until. noBepxT>, above. , close. under. no3a.4tf, behind, noneperb , across. JIOCJTB , after. npeATj > before. jipG'iK^e , before, npo , about. nporniiBTj , against. pa^H , for the sake . csepxb , in addition. CKBOSb , through. cnycmH , after. cpe/j,H , amidst. cynpomriBij , opposite. CT> , or co , from, with , about. , through , by. THEME XXX. ON PREPOSITIONS. There is no fruit without labour. Near Schaf- hausen is the celebrated full of the Rhine. Savages use sharp stones, or fish bones, instead labour , mpy/ib. a fall , there is no , Htim>. savages , fruit , IUO^TJ. iron , Schatliausen ; IIIa(J)ray- to use , ynompe6Uaini. aeHb. sharp , ocmpbiii. is, iiaxo^iimca. a stone, Ka;vie, celebrated , c^aBHbiH. a fish , pwGa. of the Rhine, PeHHCKiii. bone, Kocrnb. 12 ( 266 ) of iron. Learning serves as an ornament to man in prosperity , and a refuge in adversity. The planets revolve round the sun. The Ural mountains divide Siberia from European Rus- sia. Pleasures are the rocks , on which many young people are wrecked. They press after them with all sails set; but without compass to guide their course , and without helm ron , learning , yqenie. to serve , c^yjKHinfc. prosperity , ciacmie, as, expressed by the ins. an ornament, yicpaiiie- Hie. adversity, neoqacmie. a refuge, npn6l>HiMii^e. a planet, njianenra. to revolve, oGpau^anibCfl the sun, COJIHI^C. Ural, ypajibCKiii. a mountain, ropa. to divide , oniA*^^nib, European , Esponeii- Russia , Pocciff. Siberia, pleasure , ymixw. .a rock , CKa^a. on , o. to be wrecked, paa- many, 66jii>inaa yacmb. young, people, to press, after , sa. with all sails set, Ha Befcx-b napycax-b. compass to , AJUI* ^uide , course , helm C to steer the vessel , and so instead of enjoy- ment, they meet with shame and disappoint- ment. What melancholy ideas of the tran- sitory grandeur of nations are excited in Italy, at the foot of ancient columns ; on the top of triumphal arches; in the interior of ruined tombs, and on the mossy banks of fountains. Apollo is sometimes represented with a lyre, to steer the vessel , MO- ryujaro and so , H noinoMy. enjoyment , yAOBOjib- cmuie. to meet , Bcmptqarnb. shame , cuibi/vb. disappointment, orop- what , melancholy,neqUbHbiH. idea , Mbic^ib. transitory, HeiiocmoflH- HblH. grandeur , nation , are excited , CH, Italy , the foot, ancient , a column, Kojioima. the top , Bbicoma. triumphal , raop/Kecrn- arch , Boporna. of ruined , a tomb, mossy, bank , Geperb. a fountain, Apollo, sometimes, to be represented, a lyre , anpa. and sometimes with a drawn bow. Innocence smiles like a vernal morning, upon her ele- vated brow sit peace of mind and tranquility ; unfading roses and lilies bloom upon her eheeks. ' The playful zephyrs sporting around her, wanton with her white and airy robe and floating locks. Crowned with the flowers of the Graces she glides along the smiling earth, drawn , bow, iyinocence, HeBHHHocmb. to smile , y^biGambca. like, noAoGno, gov. the dat. elevated , BLICOKIII. Lrow, qCv/io. to sit, w3o6pa>Karnbca. peace of mind , A,y- tranquility , cnoKon- cmBie. unfading, a rose , posa. a lily , JiiiJiifl to bloom, the cheek, playful , zephyr, to sport, BiimLCJi, irr. to wanton, iirpamL,gov. the ins. airy, white robe , floating, lock , BO.toct. crowned , yi flower , the Graces , rpaujir. to glide , uiecinBOBamb. along , no. smiling, Gjiaroc^OBen- Hbiif. the earlh , -) storms and clouds flee at her approach , and celestial happiness spreads itself before her in sunny ravs. When mortals obeyed the voice of beneficent Nature, and lived in love , tran- quility and peace , innocence resided upon earth ; but when man , in a fatal hour of er- ror, spurned the laws of nature, then inno- cence returned (up) to heaven , her native place. Since that time she rarely visits the a storm , Gyp a. Clouds , MpaKIf. at her approach , onrb nee. to flee , celestial , happiness, to spread one's self, us- ray , sunny a mortal , CMC to obey , noBHHOBanib- cn. the voice , rjiaci>. beneficent to live , ;Kiimi>. love , juoGoBt V. 3(5. tranquility , raninHiia. peace , Mnpij. to reside , oGiimatnb. fatal , hour, error, 3a6jiy/K/i,eiiie. to spurn, npeanpamL. to return, BO3BpainHraj>- ca. up , na. heaven, HeGo, V. 45. to , e-b. her native place, CEOC omeiecniBo. since , CT>. rarely , to visit ; C 2 7 ) earth and is seldom seen by mortal eye. (visible to the eye of mortal). to be visible , 6i>iBamb the eye , OKO , V. 45. BHAUMy. a mortal, CMepniHbiii, to, K-b. V. 28. CHAP. IX. CONJUNCTIONS. 245. The conjunction is apart of speech, which serves to connect words and parts of sentences. $ 246. Conjunctions are divided , according to their signification , into : i) Connective. w , and. maK-b , so. /ja , and , but. ne mojibKO , not only. maKJKe , also. HO H , but. KaKT> as. flajKe , even. 2) Distributive. , or. HH , not , nor. iiGo, either. neateaii, than. 3 ) Conditional. , if. 6yAe , in case, mo , then. KOJIH , if. Kor^a , when. mor/i,a , then. 4) Concessive. nycmb, or nycKaii , let. CKOJII, HH , however SOUTH , J much. Jalthough. xorna 6w,^ KaKt HH , however. npae^a , true. imo HH , whatever. 5) ddversative. a , but. HanponiHBTj, on the con- HO, but. trary. , still. mojibKo ormoKMO,only. , than. He B3npaa na mo , not- , otherwise. withstanding. 6) Causative. , for. nomoMy qmo, f , , , /because. noejiHKy , because. A^a moroiiiio;S Conclusive. no ceMy, hence. cjitAOBamejitHo , con- H maKt , and so. sequently. nomoiviy , therefore. 8) Comparative* K3K-b, as. inbarb, the. man* , so. mamj-inio , so that. , the more. 9) Relative. imo , AaGbi, qinoGbi , that. THEME XXXI. ON CONJUNCTIONS. Forget not your own weakness , that you may the more readily excuse the errors of others. Neither precepts , nor severity act so powerfully on morals, as a good example. Na- to forget, saGbiBamb. another, your own, coGcmBeHHbin severity , crnporocmb. CBOH. a precept , HacmaB.ie- weakness , cjiaGocmb. nie. readily, y^oGHWH. to act, to be able, Mont (V. irr. powerfully , ck verbsj. morals , npaBbi. to excuse , n3BiiHflmb. good , xopomiii. an error, norpiumocnib example , ( =73 ) ture produces talents , and education dis- plays them. Death spares neither rich , nor poor. Fear not death , but shame. Although the commencement of learning is difficult, the end is delightful. Pythagoras obliged his scholars to remain silent five years, that they might learn to reflect. Avoid indolence : for it is the source of many vices. True civiliza- tion not only opens a way to fortune , but to produce , npoiiSBO- talent , education , Bocnuma- nie. to display, o death , CMepint. to spare , a rich man, GoramwH. a poor man , to fear, shame , the commencement, na learning, yqenie. difficult, mpy^Hbi the end , Koneirb. delightful, Pythagoras , ILiearop-b. to oblige, aacina- a scholar , yieHHKT> five years , namb jitii. to remain silent, MOJI- to learn , to reflect , to avoid , indolence, the source , ncniou HIIKT> true , ncnriiHHbiH. civilization , oGpasoBa ne. \p open confirms our internal happiness. Mental beauty is preferable to external beauty. Human hap- piness is so uncertain, that it may be destroyed in a moment. The heavier a body is , the more rapidly it falls to the earth. The Americans said to their oppressors: You, who behave so tyrannicaly and cruelly towards us, you must be either Gods, or suck people as our- selves ; if you are Gods, you should be a way , nymL. to confirm, ymBepjK internal, BHympeimiH. happiness, Gjiarococino- mental , beauty , Kpaeoma. preferable , jiy external , uncertain, Henocmoan- ii bin. lobe destroyed , MSM^- HHlUbCH. a moment, MrHoueme. a body , nrkio. heavy , rapidly, CKopo. to fall, na^aim. an American , to say, roBopiimi> an oppressor, so , cmojib. tyrannically , caMo- BJiacmHo. cruelly , cypouo. lo behave, nocmynarnii. towards, cij , gov. the ins. must, such people as oursel ves, manic ac merciful to men , and //"you are such creatures as ourselves , you should remember humanity. merciful, ainjiocepAbiii. humanity , toremernber, noMHHmb. CIDBO. CHAP. X. INTERJECTIONS. 2^7. Interjections are, mere sounds expres- sive of the different emotions of the soul , and denote, Joy. a! ra ! Ah! ypa ! hurra! Grief. yBbi ! Alas ! ax*! Ah! S u r p r is e. lie ncejib ! Indeed ! Aversion. mb(j)y! Fye! Desire of silence. met! Hush ! Silence! Pain. ail! Oh. C Incitement of attention. jy! hear! Hark! Listen! Ca II i n g. SH! Holla! Encouragement. Hy! HYJKC ! now then ! THEME XXXII. ON INTERJECTIONS* Oh, endearing ties of country, kindred and friendship! Ah, how happy is he , who en- joys peace of mind ! Alas ! how uncertain is human happiness. Alas ! all hope is vanished. Woe to thee thou impious man! Ah, how endearing , Mkibiii. mind , ties, }'3bi. uncertain, HenocmoAH- country , ome'iecmBO. HLIH. kindred , poAcmso. happiness , C'lacraie. friendship , Apy^6a. human happy , cqaciiuuiB-b. to vanish , to eniov , iiacjiajKA^nii'" hope , * i * Cff. impious man , He- peace , cnoKoiicmBie. 277 glad! am that I have met you. The troops met their beloved leader with loud cries of Hurra ! glad , paA"b. beloved , to meet , yBHAtmhCH. leader, the troops , BofieKO. loud , to meet, BcmpiiraiirnL. cry, KpwKT>. CHAP. XL DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. SECT I. DERIVATION. i. SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES. 248. Substantives are derived from other substantives by the addition of the following terminations , which denote the occupation of a person with the object, expressed by the pri- mitive : -FIMKV. -ClKl. 8 J in num. , copper. wbAHnK-b, a copper-smith. , a stove. neqwtf&, a stove-builder. oxoma , a hunt. oxornw^fffc , a hunter. coB-feiirb , counsel. coBtrnw/ft, a counsellor. Examples t in which the Jinal consonant is changed. canorb , a boot. cano^HUKi, a boot maker. rptxt , sin. rpt^HiiKij , a sinner. 6aiiiMaKi> ; a shoe. 6a^/>jauiHHKT> ; a shoe maker. in O6HHKT). , a garden. ca^o, a colonel. cant, a dignity. c&udeunKt , a dignitary. in nepenjLem-b,Linding.nepen\/ieinewffi>,a book binder. a transla- nepeBo^w/i-*, a translator. tion. ll , a stone. KaMenj^Mtffc , a stone-mason. , a grave. MorHJibiz/w/rt, a grave-digger. an inn. mpaKmiipz^wOjan inn-keeper. , a drum. 6apa6aH#/JiK&, a drummer. in aKT>. pwGa , a fish. pbiGffz> , a fisheriran. , a wonder. nyjflK'b , an original. 3 in apb. cmoj[-b , a table, cmojidpb , a cabinet-maker, snout , ringing. 3BOH/?& , a ringer. in avb. mpy6a , a trumpet, mpyftatb , a trumpeter. cKpknKa, a violin. CKpimazfr , a fiddler. in AKb. Mope , the sea. Mopy*tf& , a seaman. a country. SCMJI^^S , a countryman. 249. When the derivatives terminating in are not personal , or do not mark the occupation of a person with the object expressed by the primitive, they denote , that the derivative is a receptacle of the substance , expressed by the primitive as , .iaii , tea. qaiittjftfz. , a tea-pot. MOJIOKO, milk. MQjiouiHMKTi , a milk-pot. KO(J)eH , coffee. KOfJDenw'z> , a coffee-pot. 25o. The termination /t//a added to a pri- mitive has a similar signification; as, , sand. necbvmiija , a sand-box- a , ink. ^epuhjibHULfa , an ink-stand, rociiib , a guest. rocmlmmtya , an inn. 25 1. This termination denotes also the occupation of a female with the substance ex- pressed by the primitive, or the feminine of titles and professions ending in HURT* and ), acolo- noJiKOBjt2/<2, a colonel's wife. pel. nwcarnejiL, a writer, nncamejibwwz/a, a female writer. MOJIOKO , milk. MOJioiuwz/fl, a milk-maid. a52. The derivatives formed by the addi- tion of C777GO denote a suhstance or quality connected with the signification of the pri- mitive ex. coctAi, a neighbour. coc^Acmeo, neighbourhood. pa6i> , a slave. paGcmeo , slavery. jitKapb , a doctor. ji-fcKapc/T/tfo , medicine. a53. The derivatives ending in ie require the prefix of a preposition to the substantive, ex. CMepmb , death. 6e3CMepm/ , a coffin. naArp66fe , a tomb-stone. 2. SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. 254. Substantives are derived from ad- jectives, by changing the adjectival termina- tions bin and in into ocnri , ecmb , cmeo 9 nna, OTJJCI, ie and eyi> , ex. proud. roipAocmb , pride, , heavy. mhmecmb , heaviness. GorarnbiH, rich. Goramcmeo , riches. mHxin , tranquil. mnwnHci . tranquility. raojicrnbiH , thick. mojicmomd , thickness, a , healthy. 3^opoiu> , health. stupid. rjiync-z/z. , a fool. 3. SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS. $ 255, Substantives are derived from verbs by changing the final mb of the infinitive * into 6a , me, , ZHRT> , and OKI* HHKI> to serve, b, to look. jiHcami>, to write. , to b uy. jiramb , to lie. HFpami>, to gamble. , to teach, to carve, nb, to contract, to weave. service. CMomptrt , human. water. BO/VZWWW, aqueous. aSj. Several adjectives are derived from the plural of substantives by the addition of Hbiii ; as , *jydeca , miracles. vyAecnbiM, miraculous. HeGeca , the heavens. He6ec6m , heavenly. 5. ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS. 258. Adjectives are derived from verbs by changing the termination 7776 of the infinitive into HUM, Jib\n , Kin , tin , JKIM, and nebiii , ex. norpeGamb , to bury. norpeGsubHww , burial. , to radi- 3aKOpeHt^&m,deep-roo- cate. ted. , to break. jioM/rm , brittle. pa6omarni , to labour. paGozm, laborious. npoxo4HmB , to pass. npoxo^'m , transitory. nrpamjb, to play. tirpiiebin , playful. ( 283 ) $ a5p. Many adjectives , and derivatives with the adjectival termination , have the signi- fication of substantives. a savage. npoxojKm , a passenger. , a pilot. C^VJKHBOH , one who serves. 6. VERBS DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES. 260. Verbs are derived from substantives by adding the infinitive terminations , ami , limb, nmb and mb , preceded by t to the pri- mitive , ex. , defence. uuqHmo/ffft , to defend. , salt. cojiw/776 , to salt, irfepa , a measure. Mtp/z/7/6 , to measure. juyMij , a noise. niyMg/776,to make a noise. 7. VERBS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. 261. Verbs are derived from adjectives by changing the adjectival terminations birt and in into the infinitive termination 7776 prece- ded by a vowel , ex. ao^omwn, golden. 3OJiomz^77& , to gild, cyxoii , dry. cywumb , to dry. red. KpacHj/7/6, to blush. , great. Eejiiwdmb , to magnify. , clear. o6bHCHvi/77& , to explain. 8. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVE s. $ 262. Adverbs are derived from adjectives by changing the adjectival terminations bin and in into o, ex. 60iaroqecrnHBbiM , pious. GjiaroqecrnnBo, piously. npocmwH , common. npocmo, commonly. iH, diligent npn^tJKHo , diligently, iii, bitter. ropbKo , bitterly. TJISLA.KIII , smooth. rjia^KO , smoothly, cmporiia, severe. cmporo, severely. SECT. II. COMPOSITIOK". 268. Compound substantives may be formed: I st * By the combination of a primitive with a verbal substantive ; as , dnie , geography. nie , a shipwreck. navigation. 2 1 }*- By the combination of a substantive with an adjective. , kindness. aeie , wickedness. nonsense. 3ty- By the combination of a verb with a substantive as , 4ecmo^K>67oMo^Jls^cublU , thundering. a 1 /- By the combination of two adjectives; as, CBtmjio-rojiYGbiii , light-blue. meMHo-6yphjii , dark-brown. ocnrpo-KoHe4Hbiu , sharp-pointed. C 286 ) Sty- By the combination of a numeral with an adjective; as, , uniform. , quadruped. , pentangular. 265. Compound verbs may be formed: r st t By the combination of a substantive with a verb ; as , tfU^omBopknib , to do good. 7rj'/77, u famous people, ( .88 ) ie HpaBM , good manners ; cKpoMHan JKCH- , a modest woman, ofiwupnoe oaepo, an extensive lake; oGiimarnejifc xojio^nazo KAUMama, an inhabitant of a cold climate , &c. 270. When a possessive adjective precedes two or more substantives, it agrees with the first in number, gender and case, ex. omeze- cKa/i Jiw6o6b n nonenenie, paternal love and care. 271. When an adjective follows two sub- stantives and relates to both, it is put in the plural , ex. FoMepii H Bupriuiiii , cJiCLGHbte CBO- iiMH cninxornBopeniaMii , Homer and Virgi famous for their poems. When the substan- tives are of different genders the preference is given to the masculine , ex. napo^bi H zocy- Aapcmea 3naMettumbic 6T> ucmopin , the nations and kingdoms, celebrated in history. 272. When a common and proper noun occur together, the adjective must agree with the common , ex. ptna /J,Hl>npi> no npimkHt MHO- SKecmBa noporoBb necnoc66na KT, cyAOXO4cmBy. The river Dneiper is unfit for the purposes of navigation on account of its numerous falls. Rem. The above rules relate equally to the -cardinal numbers, OAHHL, one; ABfc, two, and 66a both; to the ordinal numbers, and to the re- lative, possessive, demonstrative and indefinite pronouns. EXAMPLES OF THE CONCORDANCE OF ADJECTIVES, NUMERALS, PRONOUNS , AND PARTI- CIPLES WITH THEIR SUBSTANTIVES. A pronoun and adjective. Mas. Sing. N. MOH BtpHbiii Apyrb f my true friend. G. Moero Btpnaro Apyra , of -- -- - D. MoeMy BtpnoMy Apyry , to -- -- A. Moero Btpnaro #pyra , ----- I. MOHBTb BipHbiarb ^pyroMij , by or with- P. o aioeM-b BtpiiOMij ^pyrt a of --- P I u. N. MOH BtpHbie Apysba , my true friends. G. Moiixij BtpHbixii ^pyseS , of D. MOHMTj BtpHblMTj 4py3I>/IMl> , tO - - - A. MOHXT> BlipHblXT> , .ApySCM , - - -- . I. MOHMH BtpHblMH /l,py3baMK , by OF Wlth- P. O MOHXfc BtHblXt ASLHX* Of -- A pronoun and participle. F e m. Sing. N. cia raeKyiqaa p-BKa, this flowing river. G. ceii meKyin,eii ptKii , of -- _ D. eeii meicyiqefi ptnii , to -- A ciio meKymyio pfeny, ---- . I. ceio meKymeK) pliKoro , by or with. P. o ceii ineKyiijeji pint, of --- i3 C P I u. N. cm meKyiijia p-feKH , these flowing rivers. G. CHXTJ meKyiu,nxT> ptK* , of -- D. OHMfc ineKymHMij p^KaMb, to A. cik meKymia p-feKH , I. CHMU ineKymwMH pfcKaMii , by or with P. o CHXT* meKyin,iiXT> pftKaxi) , of A PRONOUN AND NUMERAL. Neat. Sing. N. Bauie nepBoe micbMO , your first letter. G. Baiuero nepBaro nncbwa, of D. BauieMy nepBOMy nucbiviy , to --- A. Bauie nepsoe nwcbMO , I. liauHi.M b nepsbiiMb niicbMOMij , by or with - P. o BauieMTi nepBOMb nncb\ii , of P I u. N. BauiH nepBbia nkcbwa , your first letters. G. BauiMxi> nepBbixfc HHCCMI. , of ---- D. BauiHMij nepBbiMb nacbMaMij , to --- A. BaiiiH nepBwa nkcbMa I. Bamii \iu nepBbiMH nkcbMaiviH , by or with P. o BauiHXT> nepi)bixi> nkcbMaxi* , of -- SECT. 11. CONCORDANCE OF VERBS. $ 278. The verb agrees with its nomina- tive in person. and number, ex. H zj-^tAfo , 1 walk ; OHT> niiwewb he writes ; Mbi we draw- gbi jKe^ideme, you wish. 2?4- I' 1 tne P ast tense the verb must agree with its nominative in gender also, ex. rpo>n> rpa- uyjib , wojmifl 6Aecnj.ia , H Mope aaiuyMtAo , the thunder rattled , the lightning flashed, and the sea began to roar. $ 275. Passive verbs agree with their nomi- native in gender and number through all the tenses , ex. PHAII 6biAT> 63/irm> n pci3zpd6jieH'b FajuiaiMH , Rome was taken and pillaged by the Gauls. MmdMn 'lacmo noctmaema nyrneiue- cmBeHHHKaMH , Italy is frequently visited by travellers. $ 276. When two or more nouns or pro- nouns are connected together in a sentence as joint agents or subjects , the verb must be in the plural , ex. JKueonncb n eaAnie npo- il8t>mdtoTm> BT> Mraajiin , painting' and sculpture flourish in Italy. CHAP. II. GOVERNMENT. SECT. I. GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. $ 277. When two substantives occur together, the one , which answers to the question whose P of which ? of what ? is put in the genitive case , ex. CBtim> ucmnnbi , the light of truth; i;ap- cmBOBaijie Aezycma, the reign of Augustus. * $ 278. In such instances as the latter, where the relation of the two substantives denotes possession , a possessive adjective is frequently used instead of the genitive case , ex. Aury- cmoBO i^apcmBOBanie, Augustus' reign ; Mondp- luaR MHJiocmb , the Monarch's bounty. $ 279. Substantives , which denote qnantity, measure or weight govern the genitive case , ex. napo^a t a multitude of people t , a glass of water ; ny^-b Mynu , a pood of flour &c. * The dative case is sometimes used instead of the ge- nitive, ex. xoaflHHTi ^DMY, the master of the house j ro- cnoAWHTi HMlmiro, the proprietor, or lord of 1 the estate; po- cnnci> KHwraMTi , a catalogue of books. ( -93 ) 280. When a quality is ascribed to an ob- ject , the noun , which expresses that quality ; is put in the genitive case , ex. jKeHLU,HHa npaea , a woman of miid manners; ebicoKaeo pocma , a tall man. 280. The word oxoraHMK-b (fern. oxomHHLia) an amateur , governs the gen. case with the preposition 4,0 , as : ona oxomnnna 40 she is a lover ol reading; ow> oxommiKTt n , he is an amateur of horses. SECT. II. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 281. The adjectives Aocm6nHT> , worthy; , strange (free from); n6jiow> full, govern, the gen. case ; as, zej,o(iiKT> ^ocmoHHbin nozme- nin, a man worthy of resppct; cocyjT, nojiubin, eoju , a vessel full of water; ZJ/R-^Z, npncmpd- cm in , free from prejudice. 282. The adjectives eipew, , faithful; sna- KOM-b , known; Mnjn> , agreeable; juofasew, , lovely ; nojiezen-b, useful ; npnjiwen-b , proper ; pdeen-b , equal; no4,66em> , like; humble; copasMtpeH-b , proportioned; pleasant , govern the dative case , as : BipeHj, Focy^dpro , faithful to the sovereign; MUM, agreeable to every one &c. $ a83. The adjectives , djizem> greedy ; cno- c66ew> or zo^em , fit; npujiimen-b , diligent; npncmpdcmen-b , prejudiced ; zomoeT, , ready ; cKAoneW} , inclined ; crnpacmemt , passionate ; cocm pa Adm extern , compassionate , govern the dative with- the preposition & , ex. npncmpd- crnenT> K-L mpi , passionately fond of gaming ; cocTnpU4,a.TnejieH'b KT> Hecz,dcmHbiMi> , compassio- nate to the unfortunate &c. $ 284. The adjectives : 6epeyKJiu6T> , careful ; noxoMb) like; ^epsoKT, , bold; Jiezoirb , active (light) , govern the accusative with the pre- position /m, ex. oz GepewAue-b na n.idmbe , he is careful of his clothes ; ow* ^epsoKTj na , he is hold in his speech; &c. S 286. The adjectives fai^cm, , pale ; Si poor ; 6ozdrm> , rich ; GoAewj , sick ; great; 6b?coKi> , high; 4^0, wild; content; snaMeHunrb, cJideem , celebrated ; TT/eKfc , distinguished ; KpomoKT> , gentle ; little; nmoK-b, low; cmap* , old; z^wcwz. , clean; cKy-jem , miserable ; jinueM-b, his face is pale ; owa 6oAbnd eoAoeoro, her head aches; sudmenit nopo^oio , of a dis- tinguished race &c. $ 286. The adjectives : ncKyceni , skilful ; ncnpa 6ew> , exact ; yMipern* , moderate; meepAi*, firm; fiocmoAnen-b , steady, govern the instru- mental case with the preposition 67>, e\. Oz ncnpdeewt 6T> AOJUKHocmn , he is exact in his duty; ana yMtpenna 6T> niiiyt , she is moderate in her food &c. $ 9.87. Adjectives of \he comparative degree (when not connected with the substantive by the particle neweMi , than) govern the gen. case, ex. zecmb 4op6%ce xcusnit t honour is dearer than life. The latter manner is generally employed, when the comparison is vague and indefinite. SECT. III. GOVERNMENT OF NUMERALS. $ 288. ^Ba , two ; 66a both ; mpn , three ; and qeniLipe, four, when used in the nominative , require the gen. sing. ex. ABa pyGjin, two roubles; mpn AHH , three days; qemtipe KopaGjia, four ships ckc. When there is an adjective rela- ting to the same substantive , it is frequently put in the genitive plural instead of the no- minative case, ex. Ana AOMa K aMeHHbixi> , two stone houses; mpn roayGa upeKpaciiwxb, three C beautiful pigeons. In the oblique cases these numbers agree with the substantives, to which they relate, ex. mpeivrb Boimaarb , to three war- riors &c. 289. Cardinal numbers from five upwards govern the genitive plural , ex. nnmb ffymo6'b ) five feet wecmb paComHnKoei , six labourers &c. The numerals jeoe , mpoe , zernoepo , go- vern the same case , when they relate to ani- mated objects. 290. When numbers are used to mark the age of a person, they are put in the genitive case , ex. onb menuAcn mpuAiidmn, a yMepi ce- MUAecnmn Mrm> , he married at thirty , and died at seventy years of age. SECT. IV. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 291. Active verbs govern the accusative case , ex. po/ijainejui Jiw6sinn> ceouxit parents love their children ; mom* Baenn> cJiaeniniuyto nofitdy 9 nmo ceffn nofajKjdem'b , he gains the most glorious vic- tory , who conquers himself. But if the action extends to only part of the verb, it then governs the genitive case , ex. cnycmumb to let out part of the water; yfidenmb ndpyco6T>> to take in some of the sails , &c. 292. An active verb , preceded by a ne- gation, governs the gen. case , ex, 6e3i> npnM- JKCLHlfl He OSKHjaM, yCJltXd 6T> HayKCLXT*, CXpCCt llOt to make progress in learning without diligence. 298. Reciprocal verbs govern the instru- mental case with the preposition cz., ex. cpa- jRambcn CT> HenpiAmcjieM'b , to combat with the enemy; 6opombcR co crnpacmiMii , to struggle with the passions ; sndmbcJi CT> zecmnbuun MOAb- MU , to be acquainted with honest peopU. Reflective verbs govern the same cases as the active verbs , from which they are deri- ved. 294. Compound verbs govern different ca- ses according to the preposition, with which they are formed. The prepositions BI>, 40, CT>, oim> and npe,4T are frequently repeated before the noun , ex. Aotimu 40 Kpdutiocmu , to be driven to extremity; npe^cmdmb upe/rb cyT> , to appear before the tribunal ; coz.iauidmbcii ci> ApyzoMT> y to agree with one's friend. Verbs, composed with the preposition npii, and which signify the approach of one object towards another, require the dative case with the pre- position KT> , ex. npncmdmb KT> Gepezy , to land; npmomoenmbca KT eoiini , to prepare for war; Those composed with the particle em require the genitive ease with the preposition nzi , libjpuaiTib noGt^y H3i> pyKi> Henpifliiiejifl, to wrest the victory out of the hands of the enerny. Those composed with the particle 603 or ea require the accusative case and the pre- position na , ex. 63Alcmb a AepeBo, to climb up a tree , &c. 295. The auxiliary verb 6birni>, to be, go- verns the nominative case , when it expres- ses a permanent duration, and the instrumen- tal when a temporary, ex. cMepmb ecmb 66ii}iii sxpe6in qe-AOBtiecniBa , death is the common lot of humanity ; UleKcnnpi) 6biM> eeJiiimn Shakspeare was a great poet; IOCH H'ltKomopoe BpeMfl pa6oMT> BT> Eriinmt , Joseph was for some time a slave in Egypt. $ 296. The verbs: acejianib, to wish ; ramb, to attain , cjiyiiiarob ; to hear; Bamb, to follow; H36trarnb , to avoid; cmbi- AHmbCii , to be ashamed: AOJKHAambCfl , to await; ocraeperambCH , to take care ; Goambca , to be afraid; omqaeBainbca, to despair; estrange, govern the genitive case , ex. , to wish for happiness; cmpauikrabca , to be afraid of death. Sec. 2.97. When the passive form of the verb is used instead of the active, the norni- C 2 99 ) native case is employed in place of the ac- cusative, and the instrumental instead of the nominative, ex. ( active J BOZT> coaAajrb eceJien- HJJO , God created the universe; (passive} JBce- Rem. When the instrumental case occurs in the phrase, which is to be rendered by the passive voice, the preposition omi> with the genitive case is employed to avoid its re- petition , ex. Eorb oAapiui-b iejioB*Ka pasy- , God has endowed man with reason; oAapeirb owb Bora paayMOMij, Man is endowed by God with reason. From the above rules it will be seen , that passive verbs govern either the instrumental, or the genitive case with the preposition onrb. '$ 298. The verbs saBiictmb , to depend; HC- or Bb!jrii- CH , to liberate; BOS^epjKHBaratcH , to refrain; , to depart; o'lumambcji , to purify; , to be delivered ; cnacainLCfl ? to be saved; yKjtoniimLCfl, to recede, govern the genitive case with the preposition orm> , ex. paaptinknibcfl OUITJ GpeMCHu , to be delivered of a burden; cnacraiica onrb caiepmn , to be saved from death ; y^ajiambca orai> to depart from our native place , &c. ( 3oo ) 299. In general the same verbs, that are followed by the dative in English, govern that case in the Russian language , ex. iioBMHOBamb- CH 3aKOHa;vn>; to be obedient to the laws; BHH- Mamii rjiacy coBtcmn , to listen to the voice of conscience; irpmrfcacaniL KTJ y'leniio , to apply to learning &c. But in some instances the dative is employed after Russian verbs, when it can- not be used after the corresponding verbs in English, ex. VAOBjiernBopflmb CBoki>rb to satisfy our desires ; yHHOibC fl3biKy, to learn the latin language ; 3AOpOBbK) ; sorrow injures the health &c. 3oo. The verbs: npaBimib, ynpaBjiamb t to direct or govern; npeaiipamb, to despise; npo- Mbiuijiflrab, to speculate; yBaatamb, to esteem; pacnojiaramb, to dispose; noBejitBamb , to order (govern!; npe^BOAHinejibcniBOBamb , to conduct; , to rule ; oG^aAanib , to possess; JKep- , to sacrifice ; AopojKHmb , to esteem , , to be ill; oGiuioBamb , to abound; , to pass ; Haimb , to live ; Myqumbca 9 to be tormented; Bece^wmbCff, to rejoice; 3Bami>- Cfl, Ha3biBambca, to call one's self; wtuhmbcn , to change; BosHociirnbca , to exalt one's self; KJiflcmbca , to swear; nojibsocanibca , to profit, govern the instrumental ease , ex. 5KepmBOBanih , to saci-iUce one's estate ; npe^co- ( 3o. ) eoncKoMi*, to conduct an ar- my ; cjibiinb zecmnbiMT> leAoetKOMT* , to pass for an honest man ; nairnb CBOUMM, mpy^aMn , to live by one's own labour; ptKM ii3o6iijiy- iomi> pi^i6oio , the rivers abound with fish , &c. 3oi. The verbs cMomptmb, to look; npmvrB- qamb , to observe and roHambca , to pursue , in most instances, govern the instrumental case with the preposition 3a , ex. caiomp-feinb sa A$jioM'b , to look after an affair; npiiMtiarab aa ero nosejenieMif , to observe his conduct ; roHfliubCH sa lecmbMu \\ 60 earn cm 6 OMV , to pursue honours and riches. 3o2. The verbs: A*wcrnBOBanib , to act; yMHjiocmuBjiHmbCH , to have compassion ; ro- cno4cniBOBamb , to domineer; HaqajibcraBOBanib, to rule , and some other verbs of like signi- fication, govern the instrumental case with the preposition na^t , ex. Kpacnoptqie #fcii- cmByemi> na^b cepdyaMH c^yuu airier eii, eloquence affects the minds of the hearers, crnpacnui nep^AKO rocnoAcmByiomb na^-b pdayMOMt , not unfrequently the passions domineer over rea- son; cHcajiiimbea Haji> 6'i/tHbiM'b , to have com- passion upon the poor, &c. 3o3. The verbs rpaHimmnb , to border; , to resemble; coraacouarnbca, lo agree ; paBHambCH , to he equal ; cooGpaao- Bambca , to conform, govern the instrumen- tal case with the preposition ci> , ex. Poccia rpaHHHMirn> ci> KnmdeMi , Russia horclers upon China ; corjiacoBambca c-b ucmnnoro , to agree with truth , &c. $ 3o4- The verhs: ynopcrnBOBamb , to persist; ycirEBamh , to make progress ; BHHmbCfl , to accuse ; iicnoBt^WBambca , to confess (sins) ; npusHaBanibca , to acknowledge; oiniiGambcn , to he mistaken; ynpa>KHflmbCH , to exercise one's self; oGMaHWBambca , to he mistaken ; nyjKAanibCH , to be in want; pacKaiiBambea, to repent ; coMHtBarabca , to doubt , followed by the preposition e* , govern the prepositional case , ex. ynopcmBOBamb ei mpedoeanw , to persist in a demand; pacKawBambca 6i> to repent of one's sins; HytKAambcR mb, to pity ,- luaicainb , to weep ; \jionomanib , to take pains , myjKiirnb and CKopGimb , to be afflicted j cmapairibc/i , to endeavour; 3a66- mMnibCH , to take care , govern the preposi- tional case with the preposition o, ex. 6/t,tmh o Gjiarococmoflniii Hapo^a , to watch over the 'welfare of the people; saGomiirnbca o Bocnu- inaHiw ^trneii, to take care of the education of children. $ 807. The verbs : Bejitrnb , to command ; rornoBHrabCH , to prepare one's self; /3,anib , to give ; AonycKarab , and AOSBOJinnib , to allow ^ojiJKeHcnTBOBamb, to be obliged; ^yiviarnb , to think; JKejiamb , to wish ; saivibiTii^^rni) , to con- spire; nponoB*4OBamb, to preach ; sanpeiqarnh , to prohibit; aapeKambca, to forswear; samtBarn^ to invent; aaqmiariib, and HaqnHamb , to begin; siianib , to know; jitoGHinb , to like; Mo^Hinb , to beg, MbicjiHrnb, to imagine; MO'ib , to be able; ua^nmhcn , to hope; oGtmamb , to pro- mise ; oiiacambca , to be afraid; noBaauiBamb- c/i , and npiyqamb, to accustom one's self; HOKyuiambCH , to try ; nonyjKAamb , and npii- iiyatAaoib, to oblige; npeAnpwHUMarab, to un- dertake,; npHKa3biBarni, to order; to continue; npe^nncbiBamb , to ordain; npo- ckmb , to ask; clSupambCfl , to prepare one's self; yiwEuib , to know how; ynoBanib, to trust; xonrfiriTb , to desire , require to be followed by the infinitive of another verb, ex. paacy- AOKTJ npe4iiHrbiBapnn> nsGnpdmb nojieanoe, rea- son directs (us) to choose what is useful ; saKOHij BOHUII noBejitBaenrb jitoGhmb ^pyrb Apy- ra , the law of God commands (us) to love one another. SECT. V. GOVERNMENT OF ADVERBS. 3o8. The adverbs: ^ocmoHHo , worthily; MHoro , much ; AOBOJILHO, enough ; wajio , little; H-ECKOJIBKO , some ; GaHS-b , near ; Kacamejib- HO ,- relatively; BAOJII> , along, BMtcmo , in- stead; BHympn , inside ; BOKpyn> , around ; no- saAH , behind ; noneperb , across ; CBepx* , be- yond govern the genitive case , ex. B^ojib 6epe^a , along the coast ; Biiympk zopo^a , in the interior of the city : cpe^ii ^eopd , in the midst of the court; CBepxt c/t^z , beyond one's strengtli , &c. 3og. Adverbs of the comparative degree govern the genitive case , ex. Jii>mo ( 3o5 ) ropa3,a,o Becexfee anwbi, summer passes much more cheerfully than winter. 3 10. The adverb : earn , out, governs the genitive case with the preposition ii3i>, from; * ex. BOHTJ H3i> AOMy, out of the house ; npnzb 9 away , requires the same case with the pre- position OTTTT> , (from) ex. npoib omi> wenA , away from me , &c. 3 1 1. The adverbs : BonpeKtf, in opposition; 110466110 , like ; npHJilmHo , npucmoiiHo , sui- tably; npomHBHo, in an opposite manner; CBOH- cmBCHHO, naturally; yro^Ho , agreeably, govern the dative case , ex. Borb o&bai^jrb AnpaaMy ywHOHcmnb c*wa ero noAo6no necKy MopcKOMy, God promised Abraham to multiply his seed like the sand upon the sea shore ; mw AOJI- HCCHTJ iKiiinb npncmonHo cocmoAnito , you should live suitably to your condition. 3 1 2. In general adverbs derived from other parts of speech , govern the same cases as their primitives. * Haii, signifies the passing of an object from the in- terior; 001%, the mere removal of one object from another. f ( 3o6 ) SECT. VI. GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS. 3i3. Prepositions require the substantives, to which they are prefixed, to be put in cer- tain cases. i. PREPOSITIONS, WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE CASE. , without. OKOJO, about. >, or 6jin3KO, near. oKpecmi* , around. , along. onpiiHb , besides. Bivrfeemo , instead. onn> , from. BHympn , inside. no^t , close. , outside. nosa^H , behind. , near-by. noneperb , across. BOKpyrb , around. nocjit , after. Aafl , for. npe>K4e , before. AO , until. nporniiBT), against. H3KJiK) ( iaa , except. pa4,n , for the sake. H3-b , from. cuepx-b , in addition. KpOMli, besides. cpe^ii , amidst. MHMO , close by. cynpomnBT>, opposite. uanpornHBTj , opposite, y , at. a. PREPOSITIONS, WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE CASE. KT> or KO , to. 3. PREPOSITIONS , WH'ICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE CASE : npo , about. CKHOSB , through. *jpe3i> , through. cnycrn/i , after. 4. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE INSTRUMEN- TAL CASE : H3AT> , over. MewAy , among. Rein. MC/K^y governs the genitive also. 3i4 The following prepositions vary their sign ideation according to the vase of the sub- stantive, to which they are prefixed. 3a , governs the accusative , when it signifies for, and the instrumental, when it signifies behind. Uo47, , under, and npe^-b , before, govern the accusative case, when they denote the motion of one object towards another, and the instru- mental case, when they express the stationary position of an object. , in, and Ha, on, govern the accusative case , when they denote the motion of one object towards another , and the prepositio- nal , when they express the stationary posi- tion of an object. CT> , or co, from, governs the genitive case. C-b , or co t with, governs the instrumental case. Cv , or co, about, governs the accusative case. I7o , according, governs the dative. I7o , until, governs the accusative. Ilo , after, governs the prepositional. 3i5. The prepositions BO, KO and co are used instead of HT>, KI> and CT> , when the word, to which they are prefixed , begins with two or more consonants , and the sound requires the intervention of the vowel, ex. co CKa^w , from the rock- KO Mirb , to me; BT> cmapimy , anciently. Rem. When a noun is preceded by two pre- positions the first is the governing preposi- tion , ex. naif no/rb cinojia , from under the table , H3fc sa cmtHw , from behind the Avail &c. CHAP. III. CONSTRUCTION. 3i6*. Construction treats of the arrange- ment of the different parts of speech in the formation of a sentence. In the Russian lan- guage words may be placed in the natural , the inversed , or the interrogative order, ex. n ninny nwcbMo , I am writing a letter; UHCB- MO anumy, a letter I am writing ; niicajfb jin n niictMo ? have I written a letter ? &c. 3 [7. In the natural order the first place is occupied by the nominative of the phrase, the second by the verb and the third by the regi- men of the verb. ex. oiia qnmaenrb KHnry , she is reading a book ; in which phrase, KHkra, a book, is put in the accusative case , being the regimen of the transitive verb qiimamb , to read; these three principal members of a sen- tence admit the insertion of explanatory parts of speech , as : adjectives , numerals , adverbs &c. in the arrangement of which the following rules are to be observed : 3 18. The adjective should precede its substantive , ex. oiia qiiinaeiirb aaffdany/o KHH- ry, siie is reading an amusing book. 3rg. The genitive case follows the nomi- native , ex. iiHCb\ia PyccKueo nymeuiecmeeHHUKa, the letters of a Russian traveller. 820. Numerals generally precede the nouns, to which they relate, ex. Aa qaca , two hours. When the numeral follows the noun , the number is not marked with precision, ex. qaca ahout two hours ckc. 821. Pronouns should precede their sub- stantives , ex. cia cmpaua, this country, and when the substantive is qualified by an ad- jective, they precede the adjective also, ex. cia npenpacHaa cmpaHa , this delightful country. 322. The apposition is placed after the substantive , to which it belongs , ex. J3l>pa , ci>i KpomKaH Aiqepb neGa , ymfewaeiirb nacT> BTJ HecqaciuiH, Faith , that gentle daughter of heaven, consoles us in misfortune. 323. The adverb generally follows the verb , ex. a 'JHdiajrb Biepa KHary , 1 read a book yesterday. 324. When two verbs occur in a phrase, the infinitive mood is placed after the indi- cative , ex. oHb aaciiiaBiu'b cparosb mpenemdmb, he made the enemy (toj tremble. C 3.. ) Rem. Although the above may be the most natural disposition of the different parts of speech in a sentence, yet the Russian language (on account of its declensions by cases &e.) allows much greater liberty in construction, than can be taken in En- glish composition without injury to per- spicuity. The best Russian authors have paid much more attention to harmony than to the rules of construction , and in reading their works we continually meet with the following departures from the natural order. $ 325. The adjective placed after the sub- stantive , ex. Hapo/ib PocciitcKiii, the Russian people ; Myao> cAd6Hbiil , a celebrated man &c. $ 826. The transposition of the pronoun , ex. omeirb MOH , my father; Apyrb MOM, JH)be3- Hbiu , my dt-ar friend; M .iJocmHBbiii rocy^apb MOM, my honoured sir &c. 327. The apposition before the principal noun, ex. My;Kb cviauHbiii H yjeHwii, 4oKi>, that celebrated and learned man, Locke. 828. The infinitive before the indicative , ex. yjKacdmb sparon* JKe'cinoKOCinim, GbK-io ero npauHjioMTj; It was a rule with him to terrify tlie enemy by his cruelty. 829. Beginning the sentence with the word, to which it is intended to attract attention , ex. a oim> sac* nojiyqhjrb eacT> nojiqk*T> a ceroAHa HHCLMO. nncbMo nojiyiiurb n cero^Ha oriiij which transposition of words has the same effect in the Russian language , as the trans- position of emphasis in English, ex. I received a letter from you to day. I received a letter from you to day. I received a letter from you to day. 33o. A phrase becomes interrogative i) by the transposition of the verb and the ad- dition of the interrogative particle JIH , ex. BLI 6wjin BT> MOCKB* , you have been in Moscow GwjiH JIH BW BT> MocKBib? have you been in Moscow? 2.) by prefixing an interrogative pro- noun or adverb, Ko^Aa GMJIH BW BT> MocKBi? when were you in Moscow ? KaKoil ropoj,^ BaMt Gojite HpaBHincfl IlapHJK'b hjiu AOHAOIU* ? which city do you prefer, Paris or London? 33 i . The interrogation may also be expressed by the mere elevation of the voice at the con- clusion of the phrase, as: M BW HaKaawBae- MWC EoroMfc, ^epaaeine y^krab ^pyrnxb ? c.Ka- CKJioHHinb ero Kt npnuhmiio V 3.3 ) en Bfepw- And you , punished by the Almighty, pretend to teach others ? said Vladimir to the Jewish Rabins, \vho had come to persuade him to adopt their faith. Cew xpa>n> ernponjica co- pOKi* me curb Jifciiiij, ii mbi Bb nipn AHH BOSABHT- Heoib ero ? Forty and six years was this tem- ple in Building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days ? 332. When the interrogative particle Mt is used , it generally follows immediately after the verb, or the apocopated adjective, ex. 3Haeuib jii/i mbi CBOH AOJirb? Jo you know your duty? ocmopo/KeH-b MI oirb? is he cautious? But it may also be placed after the other parts of speech, ex. anio JIH, CbiHb Baiiifc ? is this your son? ne npaB^y AH a BaMfc CKa3a.ii>? did I not tell you the truth ? He yate JIH raw GOJIL- me omqa Hauiero? Art thou greater than our father ? Sec. PART. IV, ORTHOGRAPHY. $ 333. Orthography is that part of grammar , which treats of the correct combination of let- ters in the formation of words. 334' In the Russian language words are written, as they are pronounced, every letter bearing its full and proper sound, consequently the only difficulty , that can occur in the choice ^f letters , arises from those characters, which are similar, or nearly similar in sound, but different in fo,rm, as j e, t and 3; i, n and bi-j z. and .*. 335. The letter t occurs : i*t- As the final of the prepositional singular of all substantives, except those, which terminate in the nominative singular in #, ieandb (feuij- ex, cmyjL'b , a chair , prep. Ha ^cmyjit. HOKOM , a room, BT> OBa/i,i>6a, a marriage, no Kyxna , a kitchen, npn HMCtMo , a letter, o siope , the sea, Ha a monastery, Bb MOiiacmbip-L ( 3:5 ) sty- In the dative singular of substantives, end- i ng in the nominative in a and R , as : poca , dew, dat. poefc. KOHioiuHfl, a stable, KOHIOHIH*. 3iy- In the dative and prepositional cases of the personal pronouns a, I; raw , thou, and ce6a , self; as , Mtrfc , meGt , ce6t &c. 4 ! y- In the plural of the pronouns momt , that one, and Becb, all , through all the cases, as : mfe , mtxij , mtM'b , &e. 5ty- In the instrumental singular of the pro- nouns momi) , that; KIIIO , who; nmo, what; Bech, all , as : nitivnj , Ktui) , qtivn> and Bctivrb. 6 J y- In the nominative plural fern, of the pro- noun otrb , he , as : OH* , they. J7*J' In the nominative plural feminine of the numerals 0411 H'b, one, and ^.na, two, as: - In the feminine of o6a , both, through all ihe cases: o6t , oCtux-b, oGtHMH , Sec. - In the comparative and superlative de- grees of adjectives , as : , clear, acute, and, HCH-feiimiir. In all verbs, which have the sound of the letter a before the final HIL ; as, irbmL, losing; Kpactrfemb, to blush &c. Except, MC- pemL , to die; nepenib, to push, and mepemi*, to rub. ( 3.6 ) Re?n. When the i^. person indicative termi- nates in liio, the letter* is retained through all the conjugation of the verb. 336. In general it may be remarked , that when a primitive word , or root is written with B, that vowel is retained in all the de- rivatives. The following is a list of the most useful words, in which this letter occurs, arranged according to the different parts of speech. Substantives. Anpt^b , April. Atuo , an affair. 6eci>/i,a , conversation. Abmti , children, 6bvi,a , calamity. jKe^tsa , a gland. 6'Ecij , a devil. jKejrliso , iron. , a sorceress. sanrhii , a scheme, marriage portion. SBBS^a , a star. BbKiua , a squirrel. SBBpb , an animal. w , a serpent. , the eye-ball. , a cage. KOJTEHO , the knee. , idleness. , a forest. , a stair-case, ? the summer. , a bear. , a wreath. ? faith. , weight. , a branch. B'fcmp'b , wind, anger. , a nest, j , sin. , a virgin. , grand- father. copper. Mlijii> 7 chalk. ( 3 , a shallow. Bjt>na , a change. Mtpa , a measure. Mlicino ? a place. atBCflirb , a month* M-fema , a target. , fur. a bride. , a week. Hl>ra , indolence. , the howels. ; a dinner. o6limi> , a vow. onpi>cHOKi>, unleaven- ed bread. optxt , a nut. n.vfcHT> , captivity. no6t,4a, a victory. , a district. , a log. noi;fejiyw , a kiss, irfcna , froth, irfena , punishment. pt^rbEca , a radish. ptKa , a river, ptna , a turnip. , the eye-lid. , an oration. 7 ) cBHptjib , a shepherd's pipe. CBtim> , light. a candle. , a trace. , laughter. CHliri> , snow. coBtcrnb , conscience. coc1M,b , a neighbour, cmptjia, an arrow* cmtna , a wall. c*4^6 , a saddle, clbia , seed. ctHb , a cover, ctpa , sulphur. CEHO , hay. ctmb , a net. ctBep-b , the North. mejrBra , a cart, miao , the body. m1>Hb, a shadow, inferno , dough. , bread. , a sheep-house. , hops. T> , a flower. , aim. price. ( 3,8 ) , a chain. , a flail. a man. xptirb , horse -radish. A d j e c t i v e s. iH 9 pale. 9 poor. , white. , bay. 3[>iubiM , mature. ii, celebrated. , left (side), ii , idle, in , shallow. , tender. biiip dumb. I shave. to run. irEriii, piebald. ntiuiS, foot (soldier), rare, playful. , ferocious, fresh. , blind. , ripe. gy- , crowded, entire. *. to meet. to know. Bf> cnmb , to weigh. h , to tell. , to blow. , to dispose. , to do. , to act. , to contrive. , to obscure. , to climb, to mould, to cure. Mtciinib , to knead. M'liiiJKamb, to hesitate. oGptniamb , to find. , to clothe. , to visit. , to CGUJ plain. , to cut. to .decide. cHtuairib , to consume. , to laugh. cniiLuiiuii>,o make has le , to supply. el>4b , to flog. A d v e r b e. , every-where. r^ , where, fc , together. 3/vfecb , here. BMtcrao, instead. Htr/rfc , some-where. BHt , outs'vde. HtKor/ia , once. 33y. Thv letter 3 occurs in words of foreign origin only, as: 3KBamopi> ; the Equator ; no- .asia, poetry &c. 338. The letters it and i are exactly si- milar in sound , the first *is used before con- sonants, and the second before vowels ; as, AOjiwHa , a valley. IIOJIL , July. Ml>jibH/ti;a , a mill. qment'e , reading. BWUIHH , a cherry. Haciijii'e , violence. Rem. i. The only exception to the above rule is the word Mipi>, the world , in which the i occurs before a consonant to distin- guish it from iMiipij , peace. Rem. 2. Many writers retain H in all words composed of the preposition npn, and a word commencing with a vowel , as: npiiobmarnb , to communicate; npirfc- xamb to arrive; but it is more regular to change ihe n into i t and to write such words npioGi^ainb and npitxamb. For the letter H V- 5. 389. The letter bi may always be distin- guished from H hy its guttural sound ; it oc- curs in the genitive singular and nominative plural of the substantives ending in a t and in the nominative plural of those ending in * V 5. 34o. The letter o is commonly pronoun- ced as a when it occurs in a syllable , upon which the accent does not fall , as : , the end , pronounced kanetz. 34i. The consonants , having a definite sound, are not liable to be mistaken for each other, except the compound letters // and iy , which may be written by mistake me and cz, and vice versa : , a church, and not< mcepKOBb. , bounty , --- GpamcKiii , a brother's, ciwcjienie , calculation, -- 342. The 3 of the particles us, BOS, and pas , is changed into, c when the word, with which they are connected , begins with a hard con- sonant , ex. MS , ncmpeGHirih , to destroy. B03 , BocKpeceiiie , the resurrection. pas , paune4amarnii , to unseal. 343. The hard or soft sign (T, or b) fol- lows the last letter of every word , that ends in a consonant, as: iuaro.n> , a verb 4,Bopb,a court; BtmBb, a branch; Kp'Bnocmb, a fortress Sec. 344- In the modifications , to which the va- riable parts of speech are subject , the hard sign z> occurs : jst. I n words composed with the prepositions 6e3T> , ei , H31 , 061 , om'b , JIOAI , npe^i , pas , and ci> , when the letter, which follows, the pre- position is one of the vowels e , n , t , TO or ff, 6e3z>nMeHHbiii , anony- omit34,Tj , departure, mous. no.i%AqiH, an attorney. B^tSAij , entry. npe4,xM/rymiii 9 preced- H3i>/iBjienie, indication. ing. o6zHBjieHie,declaration. cvtoftb , an assembly. aty- In the conjugation of verbs, at the end of the third person singular, and of the second and third persons plural of the present, as: om> liSAHinz. , he rides. MM qnmae;vi&, we read. ona nHiiiemz,, she writes. OHH nrpafomz., they play. 3 J y- In the past tense of all three persons singular of the masculine gender, as, a cica- 3 a jiii , I said ; mti oinBt'iajrb , thou answeredst; o^ia^^ , he kept silence. 345. The soft sign b occurs; C i st - As the final of all regular verbs in the infinitive mood, as: xo^Hmt, to walk; ro- Bopinn* , to speak &c. 2 ] y- In the conjugation of verbs, as the final of the second person singular, present tense , ex. mbi jnoOuiiifr , thou lovest ; mti cmpa- Aaem& , thou sufferest Sec. 3ty' In the second person singular of the im- perative , V 182. 4 1 J- In the middle of many derivatives , as : MCMbHMna , a mill , &c. 346. The signification of the following words is determined by the prefix of the hard or soft sign (z or t). 6pann> , brother. Bfl3i> , un elm. a tt-easure. roof. 6panib , to take. BHSI. , a bog. , a cargo. Kp6m> Kpoub , blood. * Mann, mate (at chess), iviamb , mother. jiepcniij, a finger. , a raft. heat. a table. nepcrab , earth. iijiomb , the flesh. Ubijib , dust. craojib, so much. yrojii> , a corner. irfciiTj , a flail. mecnrb , a pole. >, a goldfinch. yro^b coal. utub , a chain. mecmb, six. in,erojib, a fop. 347. The signification of the following words is determined by the position of the accent : C amjiac-b , an atlas. se/ipo , fine weather. Bo.iHa, a fleece. rvba , the lip. ;ice./it>/ia, irons. a castle. 7 to heap. KO3AW , a coach- box. Kpoio , I cover. MO K pom a , phlegm. Myna , torment. napbi , pairs. napmnb, to steam. nojoirb , full. Jiopoxij , gun-powder. a rule. amjiac'b , satin. Be^po , a pail. Bosnia , a wave. ryGa , a bay. , a gland. , a lock, sacbinauib , to doze. K03jibi , goats. Kpoio , I cut- out. Monpoma , humidity. flour. napw , vapours. to soar. , captivity. nopoKb , vice. a rudder. nycinbiHfi, a hermitage, nycmbiHa , a desert, C*MH , seed. ceMta , a family^ maro, I thaw. .raaio ., I hide. , coal, (adj.) yro^biuuii, corner, (adj. j 348. The only signs peculiar to the Russian language are u and " -j the former is placed over H f when that vowel is used in" the diphthongs att, eti, iii, on , yit, bin, tn, sii, tori, and RII the latter over e f when that -voweJ is pronounced as eo, ex. ^ajie'Ko, distant, pronounced daleoko. Sec. OF THE FIRST BOOK. ERRATA. Page 10 line 24 for numbes read numbers. 26 10 ricJies indolence. _ 5g i# excepions exceptions. L. 108 7 Coloseum Coliseum. Ii5 9 sixty nine eighty six. i/j.(j j3 indefinite definite. OMISSIONS. Page 7 line 20 omitted animal. 32 l5 -whistling, CBucm-b. ^o ]2 of the White sea, ro ^I II gratitude, < l35 8 HMKHIO , nobody , and HH4mo , nothing. 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. W? L ' r ^ JAW ( ' llMayftlRR J LD MAYS 1961 if t Itt 29f6 6tl jui " LD 21A-50m-4,'60 (A9562slO)476B General Library University of California Berkeley ^"9885